2010 GMC Yukon/Yukon XL Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Seats and Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Features and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Detection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23
3-27
3-54
3-58
3-69
3-75
3-79
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Driving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
2010 GMC Yukon/Yukon XL Owner Manual M
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Canadian Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, GMC,
the GMC Truck Emblem, and the name YUKON are
registered trademarks of General Motors LLC.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
This manual describes features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle either because they
are options that you did not purchase or due to changes
subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. Please
refer to the purchase documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found
on your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for GMC wherever it appears in this manual.
1-800-551-4123
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the
Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list
of what is in the manual and the page number where it
can be found.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25854762 B Second Printing
©
2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do
this,” or “Do not let this
happen.”
Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this
manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result
in injury or death.
{ WARNING:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Notice: This means there is something that could
result in property or vehicle damage. This would not
be covered by the vehicle's warranty.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information relating
to a specific component, control, message, gauge,
or indicator.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
0 : Adjustable Pedals
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
g : Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
_ : Tow/Haul Mode
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
v
2 NOTES
vi
Section 1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Sensing System for Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
In Brief
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-21
1-21
1-22
1-22
1-23
1-23
1-23
1-24
1-24
1-24
1-25
1-25
1-25
1-26
1-27
1-27
1-27
1-28
1-28
1-29
1-29
1-30
1-1
Instrument Panel
United States version shown; Canada similar
1-2
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4‑26.
N. Cruise Control on page 4‑7.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4‑4.
O. Tilt Wheel on page 4‑3.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4‑30.
P. Horn on page 4‑3.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4‑3.
Q. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑136.
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 3‑33.
R. Climate Control System on page 4‑18 or Dual
Automatic Climate Control System on page 4‑20
(If Equipped).
F. Tow/Haul Mode on page 3‑39 (If Equipped).
G. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑47.
H. Audio System(s) on page 4‑80.
I. Exterior Lamps on page 4‑10.
J. Dome Lamp Override on page 4‑14. Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 4‑14. Fog Lamps on
page 4‑13 (If Equipped).
K. Hood Release on page 6‑14.
L. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped).
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49.
M. Automatic Transfer Case Control. (If Equipped).
See Four-Wheel Drive (Two Speed Automatic
Transfer Case) on page 3‑41 or Four-Wheel
Drive (Single Speed Automatic Transfer Case) on
page 3‑46.
S. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑16.
Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and
Cigarette Lighter on page 4‑17.
T. StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6 (If Equipped).
Pedal Adjust Button (If Equipped). See Adjustable
Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 3‑31. Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 3‑58
(If Equipped). Heated Windshield Washer Fluid
Button (If Equipped). See Windshield Washer on
page 4‑6. Power Assist Steps on page 3‑18
(If Equipped).
U. Glove Box on page 3‑75.
1-3
Initial Drive Information
This section provides a brief overview about some of
the important features that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the
features which can be found later in this owner manual.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and
unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 feet) away from
the vehicle.
Press K to unlock
the driver door.
Press K again within
three seconds to unlock
all remaining doors.
1-4
Press
Q to lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized.
m and hold to unlock the liftglass.
Press & and hold to open or close the power liftgate.
Press L and release to locate the vehicle.
Press L and hold for two seconds to sound the panic
Press
alarm.
Press
L again to cancel the panic alarm.
See Keys on page 3‑3 and Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 3‑5.
Remote Vehicle Start
Door Locks
With this feature the engine can be started from outside
of the vehicle.
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press
Q.
3. Immediately after completing Step 2, press and
hold / until the turn signal lamps flash.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
The doors will be locked and the climate control system
may come on.
The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat
the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start
can be extended only once.
Canceling a Remote Start
From outside, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the key in the driver door. From inside,
use the power door locks or the manual door locks.
To lock or unlock the door with the manual locks, push
down or pull up on the manual lock knob.
Power Door Locks
If available, these switches are located on the front
doors.
K : Press to unlock the doors.
Q : Remove the key from the ignition and press to lock
the doors.
For more information, see:
.
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on
page 3‑11.
.
Rear Door Security Locks on page 3‑12.
To cancel a remote start:
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and hold / until the parking lamps turn off.
.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
.
Turn the ignition on and then back off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑8.
1-5
Liftgate
Power Liftgate
There are several ways to open and close the power
liftgate:
.
Press and hold & on the RKE transmitter until
the liftgate starts moving.
.
Press & on the overhead console inside the
vehicle.
.
Press the touchpad switch (B) on the outside
liftgate handle to open.
.
Press the
close.
l button next to the liftgate latch to
To disable the power liftgate function, press OFF on the
overhead console.
Liftglass
There are two ways to unlatch the liftglass:
Use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the
power door lock switches to unlock the liftgate.
1-6
.
Press the button on the underside of the underside
of the license plate applique (A).
.
Press
m on the RKE transmitter.
Windows
Seat Adjustment
The power window
switches are located
on the driver door.
In addition, each
passenger door has a
switch for its own window.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
Press the switch to lower the window. Pull the switch up
to raise it.
For more information, see:
.
Windows on page 3‑19.
.
Power Windows on page 3‑20.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
See Manual Seats on page 2‑4.
1-7
Power Seats
Manual Lumbar
If equipped, this control is
located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Increase or decrease lumbar support by turning the
knob forward or rearward.
If equipped, the power seat controls are located on the
outboard side of the front seats.
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
Raise or lower the front or rear part of the cushion by
moving the front or rear part of the control up or down.
Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
See Power Seats on page 2‑5.
1-8
Power Lumbar
On vehicles with two-way lumbar, press and hold
the top of the control to increase lumbar support.
To decrease, press and hold the bottom of the control.
On vehicles with four-way lumbar, press and hold
the front of the control to increase lumbar support.
To decrease, press and hold the rear of the control.
To raise the height of the support, press and hold the
top of the control. To lower, press and hold the bottom
of the control.
See Power Lumbar on page 2‑7.
If equipped, this control is located on the outboard side
of the seat.
1-9
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
Power Reclining Seatbacks
If equipped, this control is located on the outboard side
of the seat.
If available, this control is located on the outboard side
of the seat.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the control
forward.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑12.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑12.
1-10
Memory Features
Second Row Seats
This vehicle may have the memory package.
If the vehicle has a 60/40 split bench or buckets seats,
the seat(s) can be folded for additional cargo space or
folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third
row seats, if the vehicle has them. If the vehicle has
bucket seats, the seatbacks can be also be reclined.
These seats will have either the manual fold and tumble
feature or the automatic seat release fold and tumble
feature.
The controls for this
feature are located on
the driver door, and are
used to program and
recall memory settings
for the driver seat,
outside mirrors, and the
adjustable throttle and
brake pedal feature.
For more information, see 60/40 Split Bench Seat on
page 2‑15 or Bucket Seats on page 2‑21.
Third Row Seats
For more information, see Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Pedals on page 2‑10.
If the vehicle has a third row seat, the seatback(s) can
be folded and the entire seat can be tumbled,
or removed from the vehicle.
For detailed instructions, see Third Row Seat on
page 2‑27.
1-11
Heated Seats
Rear Seats
Front Seats
On vehicles with heated front seats, or heated and
cooled front seats, the controls are located on the driver
and passenger doors.
{ (If Equipped): Press to cool the entire seat.
+ : Press to heat the seatback only.
z : Press to heat the seat and seatback.
Continue to press the desired button to cycle through
the temperature settings: high (three indicator lights),
medium (two indicator lights), low (one indicator light),
and off (no lights).
See Heated Seats on page 2‑8 and Heated and
Cooled Seats on page 2‑9.
The heated rear seat controls are located on the Rear
Sear Audio (RSA) panel.
M : Press to heat the seat cushion and to cycle through
the three temperature settings.
See Heated Seats on page 2‑15.
Head Restraint Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants
are installed and adjusted properly.
For more information see Head Restraints on
page 2‑3.
1-12
Safety Belt
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag
The passenger sensing system, if equipped, will turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags, seat‐mounted side
impact airbags, if equipped, and roof‐rail airbags are
not affected by this.
If the vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the
following illustrations, then the vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger position.
The passenger airbag status indicator, if equipped, will
be visible on the overhead console when the vehicle is
started.
Refer to the following sections for important information
on how to use safety belts properly.
.
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2‑32.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2‑37.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑46.
.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑67.
United States
Canada
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑94 for
important information.
1-13
Mirror Adjustment
Vehicles with outside
power mirrors and
foldaway mirrors have
controls located on the
driver door.
Exterior Mirrors
Vehicles with manual outside mirrors can be adjusted
so that the side of the vehicle and the area behind
are seen.
If the vehicle has towing mirrors, they can be adjusted
for a clearer view of the objects behind you. Manually
pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility
when towing a trailer. See Outside Towing Mirrors on
page 3‑55.
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver or passenger
side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to adjust the mirror.
3. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.
Power Foldaway Mirrors
To fold the mirrors:
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded
position.
1-14
The mirrors may also include a memory function that
works with the memory seats. See Memory Seat,
Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2‑10 for more information.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Manual Foldaway Mirrors
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
Interior Mirror
Vehicles with a manual rearview mirror can be adjusted
to see clearly behind the vehicle. Hold the mirror in
the center to move it up or down and side to side.
To reduce headlamp glare during nighttime use,
push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it
for nighttime use.
Vehicles with the automatic dimming feature will
automatically reduce the glare of lights from behind
the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on and the
indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is
started.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 3‑54
for more information.
The tilt lever is located on the lower left side of the
steering column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever.
2. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable position.
3. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
See Tilt Wheel on page 4‑3.
1-15
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning
the instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the
dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or
closed.
For more information about interior lamps, see:
.
Dome Lamps on page 4‑14.
.
Reading Lamps on page 4‑15.
.
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑14.
Exterior Lighting
The exterior lamps
control is located on the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
k : The dome lamp override button is located next to
the exterior lamps control.
Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off
when a door is opened. Press the button again to return
it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come
on when a door is opened.
Reading Lamps
For vehicles with reading lamps in the overhead
console, press the button located next to the lamp to
turn it on or off.
The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. The lamps cannot be adjusted.
1-16
O:
Turns off the automatic headlamps and daytime
running lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp control to the
off position again to turn the automatic headlamps or
DRL back on.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will
only work when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
AUTO: Automatically turns on the headlamps, parking
lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights, and license
plate lamps.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
; : Turns on the parking lamps, taillamps, instrument
panel lights, and license plate lamps.
2 : Turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, taillamps,
instrument panel lights, and license plate lamps.
For more information, see:
.
Exterior Lamps on page 4‑10.
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 4‑11.
.
Fog Lamps on page 4‑13.
8:
Single wipe, turn to 8, then release. Several
wipes, hold the band on 8 longer.
9 : Turns the windshield wipers off.
6 : Turn the band up for more frequent wipes or down
for less frequent wipes.
6 : Slow wipes.
? : Fast wipes.
L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle at the top of the
lever to spray washer fluid on the windshield.
See Windshield Wipers on page 4‑6 and Windshield
Washer on page 4‑6.
1-17
Climate Controls
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can
be controlled with these systems.
If this vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
A. Fan Control
A. Fan Control
E. Air Conditioning
B. REAR
F. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
C. Air Recirculation
D. Air Delivery
Mode Control
1-18
G. Rear Window Defogger
H. Display
B. AUTO
I. Power Button
C. Defrost
D. Air Recirculation
J. Rear Window
Defogger
E. REAR
K. Air Conditioning
F. Air Delivery Mode
Control
L. PASS
G. Driver Temperature
Control
M. Passenger Temperature
Control
See Climate Control System on page 4‑18 and Dual
Automatic Climate Control System on page 4‑20.
For vehicles with rear heating and air conditioning
controls, see Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
on page 4‑27 and Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System and Electronic Climate Controls on page 4‑28.
Transmission
Range Selection Mode
The current range will appear next to the M. This is the
highest attainable range with all lower gears accessible.
As an example, when 4 (Fourth) gear is selected,
1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are available.
Press the plus/minus buttons, located on the steering
column shift lever, to select the desired range of
gears for current driving conditions. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 3‑33.
While using Range Selection Mode, cruise control and
the Tow/Haul mode can be used.
Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection
Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 3‑39.
Base trim shown (uplevel similar)
The Range Selection Mode switch is located on the
shift lever. To enable the Range Selection feature,
move the column shift lever to the M (Manual) position.
1-19
Four-Wheel Drive
If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive, you can send the
engine's driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction.
Automatic Transfer Case
2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This setting is used for
driving in most street and highway situations.
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is
ideal for use when road surface traction conditions are
variable.
4 m (Four-Wheel High): Use the Four-Wheel-Drive High
position when extra traction is needed, such as on
snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations.
4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): Vehicles with a two
speed transfer case have a Four-Wheel-Drive Low
position. This setting sends maximum power to all four
wheels. You might choose Four-Wheel-Drive Low if you
are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep
snow, and while climbing or descending steep hills.
Two Speed Transfer Case
Single Speed
Transfer Case
The transfer case knob is located next to the steering
column. Use this knob to shift into and out of the
different Four-Wheel Drive modes.
1-20
N (Neutral): Vehicles with a two speed transfer
case have a N (Neutral) position. Shift the transfer
case to N (Neutral) only when towing the vehicle.
See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 5‑41 or
Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑41.
See Four-Wheel Drive (Two Speed Automatic Transfer
Case) on page 3‑41 or Four-Wheel Drive (Single
Speed Automatic Transfer Case) on page 3‑46.
Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
4:
Press to display additional text information related to
the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3 or WMA
song. If information is available during XM, CD, MP3 or
WMA playback, the song title information displays on
the top line of the display and artist information displays
on the bottom line. When information is not available,
“NO INFO” displays.
For more information about these and other radio
features, see Radio(s) on page 4‑82.
For vehicles with a Rear Seat Entertainment System
(RSE) and Rear Seat Audio System (RSA) see, Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4‑125
and Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 4‑134 for more
information.
Storing a Favorite Station
Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port
O:
Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
BAND: Press to choose between FM, AM, or XM™,
if equipped.
f : Select radio stations.
© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.
A maximum of 36 stations can be stored as favorites
using the six softkeys located below the radio station
frequency tabs and by using the radio FAV button.
Press FAV to go through up to six pages of favorites,
each having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any combination
of AM, FM, or XM stations.
For more information, see Radio(s) on page 4‑82.
1-21
Setting the Clock
A fee is required to receive the XM service.
To set the time and date for the radio with CD, DVD,
and USB Port:
For more information, refer to:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN, then press O, to turn the radio on.
2. Press H to display HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
(hour, minute, month, day, and year).
3. Press the softkey located under any one of the
labels to be changed.
4. To increase or decrease the time or date,
turn f clockwise or counter‐clockwise.
For detailed instructions on setting the clock for the
vehicle's specific audio system, see Setting the Clock
on page 4‑81.
Satellite Radio
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM satellite radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound.
1-22
.
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
.
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See “XM Satellite Radio Service” under Radio(s) on
page 4‑82.
Portable Audio Devices
This vehicle may have an auxilliary input, located
on the audio faceplate, and a USB port located on the
instrument panel or in the center console. External
devices such as iPod®, laptop computers, MP3 players,
CD changers, USB storage device, etc. can be
connected to the auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in.)
input jack or the USB port depending on the audio
system.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” and “Using the
USB Port” under Radio(s) on page 4‑82.
Steering Wheel Controls
For vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls,
some audio controls
can be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
¨:
Press to seek the next radio station, the next track
or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot, or to
select tracks and folders on an iPod® or USB device.
For more information, see Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 4‑136.
Bluetooth®
For vehicles with an in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
allows users with a Bluetooth enabled cell phone to
make and receive hands-free calls using the vehicle’s
audio system and controls.
w/x:
Press to change favorite radio stations, select
tracks on a CD/DVD, or to navigate tracks or folders on
an iPod® or USB device.
b g : Press to silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer
than two seconds to interact with OnStar® or Bluetooth
systems, if equipped.
e − e : Increases or decreases volume.
c : Press to reject an incoming call, or to end a call.
+
SRCE: Press to switch between the radio, CD, and for
vehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
The Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it can be used
in the vehicle. Not all phones will support all functions.
For more information visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
For more information, see Bluetooth® on page 4‑114.
Navigation System
The vehicle's navigation system provides detailed
maps of most major freeways and roads throughout
the United States and Canada. After a destination has
been set, the system provides turn-by-turn instructions
for reaching the destination. In addition, the system can
help locate a variety of points of interest (POI), such as
banks, airports, restaurants, and more.
See the vehicle's Navigation System manual for more
information.
1-23
Cruise Control
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
This feature may alert you to vehicles located in your
side blind zone. When the system detects a vehicle in
the side blind zone, an amber SBZA display will light up
in the corresponding outside side mirror.
The system is enabled at every vehicle startup. It can
be disabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
I:
If the message SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS.
UNAVAILABLE appears on the DIC, the system has
been disabled because the sensor is blocked and
cannot detect vehicles in the blind zone. The sensor
may be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, slush, or even
heavy rainstorms. This message may also activate
during heavy rain or due to road spray. The vehicle
does not need service.
Turns the system on or off. The indicator light is
on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise
control is off.
See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 3‑60 for
more information.
+ RES : Press briefly to make the vehicle resume to a
previously set speed, or press and hold to accelerate.
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
SET − : Press to set the speed and activate cruise
control or make the vehicle decelerate.
The rear vision camera displays a view of the area
behind the vehicle when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse) on the inside rear view mirror or the
navigation screen, if equipped.
[ : Press to disengage cruise control without erasing
the set speed from memory.
See Cruise Control on page 4‑7.
1-24
To clean the camera lense, located above the license
plate, rinse it with water and wipe it with a soft cloth.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
This feature uses sensors on the rear bumper to
detect objects while parking the vehicle. URPA comes
on automatically when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse) and operates at speeds less than 8 km/h
(5 mph). URPA uses audio beeps to provide distance
and system information.
The accessory power outlets are powered, even with
the ignition off. Continuing to use accessory power
outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/OFF may cause
the vehicle's battery to run down.
Universal Remote System
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's rear bumper clean to
ensure proper operation.
The system can be disabled by pressing the rear park
aid disable button located next to the radio.
See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on
page 3‑58 for more information.
Power Outlets
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
The Universal Home Remote System allows for garage
door openers, security systems, and home automation
devices to be programmed to work with these buttons in
the vehicle.
See Universal Home Remote System on page 3‑69.
There are two under the climate controls, one inside the
center floor console, one on the rear of the center floor
console and one accessory power outlet in the rear
cargo area on the passenger side.
1-25
Sunroof
There are two sunroof
switches located in the
overhead console above
the rearview mirror.
Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the sunroof,
press and hold the rear of the driver side switch until the
sunroof reaches the desired position. Press and hold
the front of the driver side switch to close it.
Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open
the sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the
driver side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired
position. To express-close the sunroof, fully press and
release the front of the driver side switch. Press the
switch again to stop it.
The sunroof also has a sunshade that you can pull
forward to block the rays of the sun. The sunshade
must be opened and closed manually.
Vent: From the closed position, press the rear of the
passenger side switch to vent the sunroof.
1-26
See Sunroof on page 3‑79.
Performance and Maintenance
Tire Pressure Monitor
StabiliTrak®
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS).
The vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin and the StabiliTrak system that assists
with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. Both systems turn on automatically every
time the vehicle is started.
5 on
.
To turn off traction control, press and release
the instrument panel. F illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message displays. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑61.
.
To turn off both traction control and Electronic
Stability Control, press and hold 5 until F
illuminates and the appropriate DIC message
displays. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑61.
.
Press and release the button again to turn on both
systems.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® System on
page 5‑6.
The Tire Pressure Monitor
alerts you when a
significant reduction in
pressure occurs in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires
by illuminating the low tire
pressure warning light on
the instrument cluster.
If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the tire loading information label located on
the driver side center pillar (B pillar). See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑31. The warning light will remain on
until the tire pressure is corrected.
You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire
pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is
first started and then turn off as you drive. This may be
an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting
low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
1-27
The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about low tire
pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly tire
maintenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑73 and
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑75.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life
based on vehicle use and, on most vehicles, displays
a DIC message when it is necessary to change the
engine oil and filter. The oil life system should be reset
to 100% only following an oil change.
Resetting the Oil Life System
To reset the Engine Oil Life System on most vehicles:
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
vehicle must be in P (Park) to access this display.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC,
or the trip odometer reset stem if the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, for more than five seconds.
The oil life will change to 100%.
1-28
On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life System can be reset
as follows:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within five seconds.
3. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
If the display shows 100%, the system is reset.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑20.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
Vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 0),
the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), the 6.0L V8 engine
(VIN Code J), or the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2) have
a yellow fuel cap and can use either unleaded gasoline
or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
See Gasoline Octane on page 6‑7 and Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 6‑9.
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Roadside Assistance Program
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
U.S.: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
.
When road and weather conditions are
appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped.
.
Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new GMC, you are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program. This
program provides technically trained advisors who
are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, minor
repair information or towing arrangements.
For more information see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 8‑7.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
.
Combine several trips into a single trip.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
.
Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC
Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near
the size.
.
Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
If you have a current OnStar subscription, press the
OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent
to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem,
contact Roadside Assistance, and relay exact location
to get you the help you need.
Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service
that includes online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner manual, special
privileges and more.
Sign up today at: www.gmownercenter.com/gmc
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
1-29
OnStar®
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
navigation, diagnostics, and calling services.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can automatically alert an
OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to the
vehicle to see if you need help.
How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you to a specially
trained OnStar advisor to verify your account
information and to answer questions.
] : Push this red emergency button to get priority help
from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors.
X:
Push this button for hands‐free, voice‐activated
calling and to give voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.
1-30
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation and Hands‐Free
Calling are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar
services are available on all vehicles. For more
information see the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1‐888‐466‐7827)
or TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
For a full description of OnStar services and system
limitations, see the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar terms and
conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed
areas, or at all times.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar call center when Q is pressed, ] is pressed,
or if the airbags or ACR system deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicle's GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional information regarding the
crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the direction
from which the vehicle was hit). When the virtual
advisor feature of OnStar hands-free calling is used, the
vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle's GPS location
so they can provide services where it is located.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar hands-free calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑136
for more information.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's Guide for more
information.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system
may not be functioning properly. Press Q and request a
vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press Q to confirm
that the OnStar equipment is active.
1-31
2 NOTES
1-32
Section 2
Seats and Restraint System
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Heated and Cooled Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
60/40 Split Bench Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Bucket Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
2-32
2-37
2-46
2-53
2-54
2-55
2-55
2-55
2-59
2-63
2-65
2-67
2-75
2-1
Section 2
Seats and Restraint System
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-79
2-79
2-83
2-86
2-89
2-91
2-91
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . 2-92
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . 2-99
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
{ WARNING:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a
crash.
2-3
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{ WARNING:
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.
The rear seat has head rests that can be adjusted up
and down.
2-4
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Power Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
Driver's Seat with Power Seat Control, Power
Recline, and Power Lumbar shown
On a vehicle with power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of the
seats.
2-5
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
Manual Lumbar
Your vehicle may have additional features to adjust your
vehicle's power seat:
.
Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
.
Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
.
Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
On seats with power reclining seatbacks, the control is
located behind the power seat control on the outboard
side of the seats. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”
under Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑12.
A vehicle with a memory function allows seat settings to
be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Pedals on page 2‑10 for more information.
2-6
On vehicles with this feature the control is located on
the outboard side of the seat.
Increase or decrease lumbar support by turning the
knob forward or rearward.
Power Lumbar
The vehicle may have 4–way lumbar.
.
To increase lumbar support, press and hold the
front of the control.
.
To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the
rear of the control.
.
To raise the height of the lumbar support, press
and hold the top of the control.
.
To lower the height of the lumbar support, press
and hold the bottom of the control.
Release the control when the lower seatback reaches
the desired level of lumbar support.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2‑10 for more
information.
On seats with power lumbar, the controls used to
operate this feature are located on the outboard side
of the seats.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as
it may during long trips, so should the position of your
lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
This vehicle may have 2–way lumbar.
.
To increase lumbar support, press and hold the top
of the control.
.
To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the
bottom of the control.
2-7
Heated Seats
{ WARNING:
If you cannot feel temperature change or pain to
the skin, the seat heater may cause burns even
at low temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such a condition should use care
when using the seat heater, especially for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket,
cushion, cover or similar item. This may cause
the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may damage
the seat.
On vehicles with heated front seats, the controls are
located on the driver and passenger doors.
2-8
I (Heated Seatback): Press to turn on the heated
seatback.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on the
heated seat and seatback.
The light on the button will come on to indicate that the
feature is working. Press the button to cycle through the
temperature settings of high, medium, and low and to
turn the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights will show
the level of heat selected: three for high, two for
medium, and one for low.
The heated seats will be canceled 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off. To use the heated seat feature
after restarting the vehicle, press the heated seat or
seatback button again.
Heated and Cooled Seats
If the front seats have the heated and cooled seat
feature, the buttons used to control this feature are
located on the front doors near the door handle.
{ (Cooled Seat):
To cool the entire seat, press the
button with the cooled seat symbol.
This symbol will appear on the climate control display to
indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium, and
low and to turn the cooled seat off. Indicator bars next
to the symbol designate the level of cooling selected:
three for high, two for medium, and one for low.
+ (Heated Seatback): To heat only the seatback,
press the button with the heated seatback symbol.
z (Heated Seat and Seatback):
To heat the entire
seat, press the button with the heated seat and
seatback symbol.
This symbol will appear on the climate control display to
indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium, and
low and to turn the heated seat off. Indicator bars next
to the symbol designate the level of heat selected: three
for high, two for medium, and one for low.
The heated and cooled seats will be canceled after the
ignition is turned off. To use the heated and cooled seat
feature after the vehicle is started, you will need to
press the appropriate seat button again.
This symbol will appear on the climate control display to
indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium, and
low and to turn the heated seatback off. Indicator bars
next to the symbol designate the level of heat selected:
three for high, two for medium, and one for low.
2-9
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
Your vehicle may have the memory package.
The controls for this
feature are located on
the driver's door panel,
and are used to program
and recall memory
settings for the driver's
seat, outside mirrors,
and the adjustable throttle
and brake pedal.
To save seating positions in memory:
1. Adjust the driver's seatback recliner, both outside
mirrors, and the throttle and brake pedals to a
comfortable position.
See Outside Power Mirrors on page 3‑55 and
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 3‑31
for more information.
Not all mirrors, adjustable throttles and brake
pedals will have the ability to save and recall their
positions.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound to
indicate that the position has been stored.
A second seating, mirror, and throttle and brake pedal
position can be programmed by repeating the above
steps and pressing button 2.
2-10
To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in
P (Park). Press and release either button 1 or button 2
corresponding to the desired driving position. The seat,
outside mirrors, and adjustable throttle and brake
pedals will move to the position previously stored.
You will hear a single beep.
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter
your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature is
on, automatic seat, adjustable mirror, and adjustable
pedal movements will occur. See “MEMORY SEAT
RECALL” under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑72 for more information.
To stop recall movement of the memory function at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory
buttons, power mirror buttons, or adjustable pedal
switch.
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or the
adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position,
the driver’s seat and/or the adjustable pedals recall may
stop working. If this happens, remove the obstruction
and press the appropriate control for the area that is not
responding for two seconds. Try recalling the memory
position again by pressing the appropriate memory
button. If the memory position is still not recalling,
see your dealer for service.
Easy Exit Seat
The control for this feature is located on the driver’s
door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
With the vehicle in P (Park), the driver's seat exit
position can be recalled by pressing the exit button.
You will hear a single beep, and the driver’s seat will
move back approximately 8 cm (3 in). To move the seat
back further, press the exit button again until the seat is
all the way back.
If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement will
occur when the key is removed from the ignition. See
“EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle Customization
(With DIC Buttons) on page 4‑72 for more information.
The memory seat and easy exit features can also be
programmed using the DIC.
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4‑72.
2-11
Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{ WARNING:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
2-12
{ WARNING:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side
of the seat(s).
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-13
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
Power Reclining Seatbacks
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control
used to recline them is located on the outboard side of
the seat behind the power seat control.
.
To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
.
To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
control forward.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
2-14
Center Seat
Your vehicle may have a front center seat. The
seatback doubles as an armrest and cupholder/storage
area for the driver and passenger when the center seat
is not used. Do not use it as a seating position when the
seatback is folded down.
Rear Seats
M (Heated Seat): To heat the seat cushion, press the
button with the heated seat symbol.
A heated seat symbol will be shown in the RSA display
to indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to
cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium,
and low, and to turn it off. Indicator bars next to the
symbol will designate the level of heat selected: three
for high, two for medium, and one for low.
The heated seats are off when the ignition is off.
Heated Seats
On vehicles with rear
outboard heated seats,
the buttons used to
control this feature are
located on the Rear Seat
Audio (RSA) panel.
60/40 Split Bench Seat
If your vehicle has a 60/40 split bench, the seat(s) can
be folded for additional cargo space or folded and
tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third row seats,
if your vehicle has them. These seats will have either
the manual fold and tumble feature or the automatic
seat release fold and tumble feature.
Driver Side RSA Heated
Seat Button shown
2-15
Manual Fold and Tumble Feature
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
To fold and tumble the seat:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of,
or on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the
seat, to release the seatback.
2-16
3. Lift the same lever
again to release the
rear of the seat from
the floor. The seat will
tumble forward.
The seatback will fold forward automatically.
Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat
load floor.
If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front
seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the
upright position.
2-17
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the
Third Row Seats
{ WARNING:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could
cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to
return the seat to the passenger seating position.
Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third rows, if your
vehicle has them:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of,
or on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
2-18
2. Lift the lever(s), located on the bottom rear of the
second row seat(s) on the inboard side, to release
the seatback. The seatback will fold forward.
3. Lift the same lever again to release the rear of the
seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward
automatically.
Automatic Seat Release Fold and
Tumble Feature
The transmission must be in (P) for this feature
to work.
{ WARNING:
Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when
someone is sitting in the seat, could cause injury
to the person sitting there. Always make sure
there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing
the automatic seat release button.
Folding and Tumbling the Second Row
Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or
Outside
{ WARNING:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could
cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to
return the seat to the passenger seating position.
Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats,
if your vehicle has them:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of,
or on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
2-19
2. Press the automatic
seat release button
located on the panel
behind the rear doors.
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
Position
To return the seat to the sitting position:
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor.
The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not
latched to the floor.
{ WARNING:
Driver's Side Rear Panel
Button shown
One press of the button automatically folds the
seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward. There
will be a slight delay between the folding of the
seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and
pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
2-20
{ WARNING:
Reclining Seatbacks
To recline the seatback, do the following:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person wearing
the belt could be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
3. Make sure that the safety belt in the center seating
position is not caught between the two seats and is
not twisted.
Bucket Seats
If your vehicle has bucket seats, the seatbacks can be
reclined, the seats can be folded for additional cargo
space, or folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit
to the third row seats, if your vehicle has them. These
seats will have either the manual fold and tumble
feature or the automatic seat release fold and tumble
feature.
1. Lift the lever located on the outboard side of
the seat.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-21
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
{ WARNING:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-22
Manual Fold and Tumble Feature
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of,
or on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the
seat, to release the seatback.
The seatback will fold forward. Leaving the
seatback in this position creates a flat load floor.
If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front
seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the
upright position.
2-23
3. Lift the lever again to
release the rear of the
seat from the floor.
The seat will tumble
forward.
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the
Third Row Seats
{ WARNING:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could
cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to
return the seat to the passenger seating position.
Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
2-24
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats,
if your vehicle has them:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of,
or on the seat.
2. Lift the lever, located
on the bottom rear of
the second row seat
on the inboard side, to
release the seatback.
The seatback will fold
forward.
Automatic Seat Release Fold and
Tumble Feature
The transmission must be in (P) for this feature
to work.
{ WARNING:
Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when
someone is sitting in the seat, could cause injury
to the person sitting there. Always make sure
there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing
the automatic seat release button.
3. Lift the lever again to release the rear of the seat
from the floor. The seat will tumble forward.
2-25
Folding and Tumbling the Second Row
Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or
Outside
2. Press the automatic
seat release button
located on the panel
behind the rear doors.
{ WARNING:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could
cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to
return the seat to the passenger seating position.
Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats,
if your vehicle has them, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of,
or on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
2-26
Driver's Side Rear Panel
Button shown
One press of the button automatically folds
the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.
There will be a slight delay between the folding
of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
Position
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the
following:
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor.
The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not
latched to the floor.
{ WARNING:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
Folding the Seatback(s)
To fold the seatback, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for
the seat.
2. Remove all items on the seat cushion.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
3. Lift the release lever,
located on the bottom
rear of the seatback
on the outboard side
of the seat, and the
seatback will fold
forward.
2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and
pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
Third Row Seat
If the vehicle has a third row seat, the seatback(s)
can be folded and the entire seat can be tumbled,
or removed from the vehicle.
2-27
Returning the Seatback(s) to the
Upright Position
To return the seatback to the upright position, do the
following:
Tumbling the Third Row Seat
The seat can be tumbled forward for additional cargo
space.
To tumble the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for
the seat.
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for
the seat.
2. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the
upright position.
2. Make sure the head rests are completely lowered
and there is nothing under, in front of, or on
the seat.
{ WARNING:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-28
3. Fold the seatbacks forward using the instructions
previously listed under “Folding the Seatbacks”.
You will not be able to unlatch the seat from the
floor unless the seatback is folded down.
4. Unlatch the seat from
the floor by lifting the
lever located next to
the carrying handle on
the rear of the seat
near the bottom.
5. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor.
6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lock it into place.
7. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked.
Put the seat in this position only when necessary for
additional cargo space.
4. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor.
The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not
latched to the floor.
5. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the
upright position.
Returning the Third Row Seat from a
Tumbled Position
{ WARNING:
To return the seat to the normal seating position, do the
following:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for
the seat.
2. Make sure there is nothing that could become
trapped under the seat.
3. Release the seat from the tumbled position by
lifting the lever located next to the carrying handle
at the bottom rear of the seat.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-29
Removing the Third Row Seat
Installing the Third Row Seat
To remove the seat, do the following:
To install the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for
the seat.
2. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions
listed under “Folding the Seatbacks” previously.
The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback
is folded.
3. Unlatch the seat from
the floor by pulling
the carrying handle,
located at the rear of
the seat, rearward.
1. Open the liftgate to access the rear of the vehicle.
2. Slide the front outboard seat wheels into the track
on the floor and roll the seat forward. The front
latches should lock into place. If the latches do not
lock, try tilting the rear of the seat upward slightly.
3. Lower the rear of the seat and push down on the
seat to engage the rear floor latches.
{ WARNING:
A seat that is not locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop. People
in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the
seat into place properly when installing it.
4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle. There is a track
in the floor to guide the seat wheels out of the
vehicle.
2-30
4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to the
floor.
5. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the
upright position.
{ WARNING:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
{ WARNING:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person wearing
the belt could be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
7. Make sure the safety belts are returned to the
original position over the seatbacks.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-31
Safety Belts
{ WARNING:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This section of the manual describes how to use safety
belts properly. It also describes some things not to do
with safety belts.
{ WARNING:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
2-32
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people
to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑31
for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
2-33
Put someone on it.
2-34
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
2-35
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And
you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
2-36
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on page 2‑55 or Infants
and Young Children on page 2‑59. Follow those rules
for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
2-37
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor
in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
2-38
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
2-39
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
2-40
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
2-41
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
2-42
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
2-43
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
2-44
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
2-45
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder
belt except for the center front passenger position,
if equipped, which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt on
page 2‑54 for more information.
The lap‐shoulder belts for the first and second row
seating positions are equipped with free‐falling latch
plates. If the vehicle has a third row, the lap‐shoulder
belts have either free‐falling or cinching latch plates.
Use the following pictures to determine the latch plate
style:
Cinching Latch Plate
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the
Index.
Free-Falling Latch Plate
2-46
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt with a
free‐falling latch plate is pulled out all the way,
the child restraint locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature
in the right front seating position may affect
the passenger sensing system, if equipped.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑94
for more information.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, for
lap‐shoulder belts with cinching latch plates, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling the safety belt until it
can be buckled.
2-47
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later
in this section for instructions on use and important
safety information.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into
the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 2‑55.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-48
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap
belt on smaller occupants.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger positions.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the height
adjuster and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out
of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle.
The adjuster can be moved up just by pushing up on
the shoulder belt guide.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without squeezing the buttons to make
sure it has locked into position.
2-49
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for
front outboard occupants. Although the safety
belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part
of the safety belt assembly. They can help tighten
the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate
to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are
met. And, if the vehicle has side impact airbags, safety
belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in
a side crash or a rollover event.
There is one guide, if equipped, for each outside
passenger position in the second row seat and the
third row, if the vehicle has one. Here is how to install
a comfort guide to the safety belt:
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash on page 2‑102.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides. If not, they are available through your dealer.
The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for
older children who have outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed and properly adjusted, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck
and head.
2-50
Second Row
1. For the second row, remove the guide from its
storage clip on the interior body.
Third Row
If your vehicle has a third row, remove the guide
from its storage pocket on the side of the seat.
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
2-51
{ WARNING:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2-52
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure that
the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage
clip on the interior body or storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
2-53
Lap Belt
This part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑46.
The vehicle may have a center seating position. When
you sit in the center front seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 2‑55.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
2-54
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety
belt quickly if necessary.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure
that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take
the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat
it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for
adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
attach it to the regular safety belt. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
2-55
The manufacturer's instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
.
Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees
bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 2‑46 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for length
of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint
a shoulder belt can provide.
2-56
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the
face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below
the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This
applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a
crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑46.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out
of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts
properly.
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
2-57
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
2-58
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its
airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants
and young children ride in vehicles, they should have
the protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
2-59
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person's arms. An infant should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
2-60
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
2-61
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle's owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer's instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
2-62
{ WARNING:
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant's body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
{ WARNING:
A young child's hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child's body with
the harness.
2-63
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
2-64
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 2‑67 for more information. A child
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is
not properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
{ WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
2-65
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
The vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
Even if the passenger sensing system,
if equipped, has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe.
No one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off.
(Continued)
2-66
WARNING: (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑94
for additional information.
{ WARNING:
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child
restraint in the center front seat. It is always
better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments
on the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and also
the instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be attached
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
2-67
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
2-68
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for
use with or without the top tether being attached. Others
require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada,
the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is
available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
Second Row — Bucket
i (Top Tether Anchor):
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors. There is
one top tether anchor that
can be used for either the
third row center or driver
side seating position but
not both at the same time.
Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
Second Row — 60/40
Third Row — Three
Passenger
2-69
For models with a three passenger third row seat, see
the information following for installing a child restraint
with a top tether in the third row, if your vehicle has one.
Never install two top tethers using the same top tether
anchor.
For models with 60/40 second row seating, the rear
right side passenger and center seating positions have
exposed metal anchors located in the crease between
the seatback and the seat cushion.
For models with second row bucket seats, both rear
seating positions have exposed metal anchors located
in the crease between the seatback and the seat
cushion.
Second Row Seat — Bucket
For models with bucket second row seating, the top
tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the
seat cushion for each seating position in the second
row. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side
of the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
2-70
Second Row Seat — 60/40
Third Row Seat — Three Passenger
For models with 60/40 second row seating, the top
tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the
seat cushion for each seating position in the second
row. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side
of the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
For vehicles with a three passenger third row seat,
there is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear
of the seat cushion that can be used for either the third
row center or driver side seating position. Never install
two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
2-71
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint on
page 2‑65 for additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
{ WARNING:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to
secure the restraint, following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
2-72
{ WARNING:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could be
injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries during a crash, attach only one child
restraint per anchor.
{ WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint
has been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts
to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the
seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1. 1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if the vehicle
has one. Refer to the child restraint instructions
and the following steps:
2. 1. Find the top tether anchor.
2. 2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1. 3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2-73
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
2-74
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether under
the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the safety belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑67 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in
the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑67 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Restraint on page 2‑65.
The vehicle's lap‐shoulder belts for the first and second
row seating positions are equipped with free‐falling latch
plates. If the vehicle has a third row, the lap‐shoulder
belts have either free‐falling or cinching latch plates.
2-75
Use the following pictures to determine the latch plate
style:
Cinching Latch Plate
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Free‐Falling Latch Plate
2-76
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
For third row seating positions, with cinching latch
plates, tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if
needed.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-77
4. For passenger seating positions with a
lap‐shoulder belt and a free‐falling latch plate, pull
the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock. When installing a child
restraint using a lap‐shoulder belt and a cinching
latch plate, skip Step 4 and proceed to Step 5.
2-78
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed
the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may
be helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑67 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 2‑65.
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑94 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑33 for
more information, including important safety information.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
{ WARNING:
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child
restraint in the center front seat. It is always
better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
2-79
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
The vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
Even if the passenger sensing system,
if equipped, has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe.
No one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off.
(Continued)
2-80
WARNING: (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑94
for additional information.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑67 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑67 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-81
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed
the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may
be helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-82
If the vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensing
system, and when the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the
off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑33.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System on
page 2‑94 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver and passenger
directly behind the driver.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the person seated directly behind that passenger.
The vehicle may have the following airbags:
.
A seat‐mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
.
A seat‐mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger.
.
If the vehicle has a third row seat, it will have a
third row roof-rail airbag.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat‐mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from
the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job.
2-83
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ WARNING:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑89.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
2-84
{ WARNING:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail
airbags.
{ WARNING:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system
is designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on
page 2‑55 or Infants and Young Children on
page 2‑59.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑32 for
more information.
2-85
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
2-86
The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger's side.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If the vehicle has seat‐mounted side impact airbags for
the driver and right front passenger, they are in the side
of the seatbacks closest to the door.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the ceiling
above the side windows.
2-87
{ WARNING:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If the vehicle has a third row passenger seat, the
roof-rail airbags are located in the ceiling above the rear
windows for the outboard passenger positions in the
third row.
2-88
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce
the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or
right front passenger's head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast the vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
how quickly the vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
.
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
.
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
2-89
In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment
occurs.
The vehicle has a seat position sensor. Vehicles with
dual stage airbags also have seat position sensors
which enable the sensing system to monitor the position
of the driver seat.
The seat position sensor provides information that is
used to determine if the airbags should deploy at a
reduced level or at full deployment
The vehicle may or may not have seat‐mounted side
impact airbags. The vehicle has roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 2‑83. Seat‐mounted side
impact airbags and roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. In addition,
these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during a
2-90
rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Seat‐mounted side
impact airbags and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the
crash severity is above the system's designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear
impacts. A seat‐mounted side impact airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the veicle that is struck. Both
roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of the
vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts that
the vehicle is about to roll over, or in a severe frontal
impact.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair
costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined
by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and
how quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat‐mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and severity of the side
impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag deployment
is determined by the direction of the roll.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the
airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles
with seat‐mounted side impact airbags, there are
airbags modules in the side of the front seatbacks
closest to the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags,
there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,
near the side windows that have occupant seating
positions.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Seat‐mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first, second, and third
rows, if equipped with a third row seat. The rollover
capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce
the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events,
although no system can prevent all such ejections.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑89 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
2-91
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated
for some time after they deploy. Some components
of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.
For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑91.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able
to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
2-92
{ WARNING:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get
out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn off the interior
lamps and hazard warning flashers by using the
controls for those features.
{ WARNING:
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may
have also damaged important functions in the
vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and
steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears
to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may
be concealed damage that could make it difficult
to safely operate the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the
engine after a crash has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts.
The service manual for your vehicle covers
the need to replace other parts.
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8‑17 and Event Data Recorders on
page 8‑18.
.
Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
2-93
Passenger Sensing System
If the vehicle has the passenger airbag status indicator
pictured in the following illustration, then the vehicle
has a passenger sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger airbag status
indicator, if equipped, is visible on the overhead
console when the vehicle is started.
In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, the label
on the vehicle's sun visors refers to “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS”.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag, seat‐mounted side impact airbags
(if equipped) and the roof-rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an
older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who
are large enough, using safety belts.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are using
remote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from a
distance, you may not see the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON or
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑33.
2-94
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
.
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
.
The system determines an infant is present in a
child restraint.
.
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑33.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
2-95
For some children, including children in child restraints,
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person's seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑32
for more information, including important safety
information.
2-96
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 2‑79.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable,
to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on
page 2‑3.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system may or may not
turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint
depending upon the child’s seating posture and
body build. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
2-97
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat,
such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
2-98
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged.
This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing
system to turn the airbag off for some adult size
occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM
for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑100 for more
information about modifications that can affect how
the system operates.
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat.
If this is not desired remove the object from the seat.
{ WARNING:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat
or between the passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper operation
of the passenger sensing system.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing the vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 8‑16.
{ WARNING:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
2-99
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change about
the vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle's
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side
impact sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag
wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger's
position, which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger's seat. The passenger sensing system
2-100
may not operate properly if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim,
or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 2‑94.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 6‑82 for
additional important information.
Q: What if I added a snow plow? Will it keep the
airbags from working properly?
Restraint System Check
A: We have designed our airbag systems to work
properly under a wide range of conditions, including
snow plowing with vehicles that have the optional
Snow Plow Prep Package (RPO VYU). But do
not change or defeat the snow plow's “tripping
mechanism.” If you do, it can damage your snow
plow and your vehicle, and it may cause an airbag
inflation.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this
will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
In addition, your dealer and the service manual have
information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
Safety Belts
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip
apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get
a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑31 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6‑111.
2-101
Airbags
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4‑32 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑91. See your dealer for
service.
2-102
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{ WARNING:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during
any crash may have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑32.
2-103
2 NOTES
2-104
Section 3
Features and Controls
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Liftgate/Liftglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Power Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . 3-25
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Fuel Management™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-Wheel Drive (Two Speed Automatic
Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-Wheel Drive (Single Speed Automatic
Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-29
3-31
3-31
3-33
3-33
3-39
3-41
3-46
3-48
3-49
3-51
3-51
3-52
3-53
3-1
Section 3
Features and Controls
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Towing Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Detection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) . . . . . . . .
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-54
3-54
3-54
3-54
3-55
3-55
3-56
3-57
3-57
3-57
3-58
3-58
3-58
3-60
3-64
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With Three Round LED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-69
3-69
3-75
3-75
3-75
3-76
3-76
3-77
3-77
3-78
3-79
Keys
{ WARNING:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key is used for the ignition and all door locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer or
qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store
this information in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
3-3
See your dealer if a replacement key or additional key
is needed.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
.
Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
If you are locked out of the vehicle, call the Roadside
Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 8‑7.
.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left
or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
.
Check the transmitter's battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
.
If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer or a qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
3-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation
The following functions may be available if your vehicle
has the RKE system:
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
For vehicles with this
feature, press to start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 3‑8 for additional information.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
Q (Lock):
Press to lock all the doors.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate locking
has occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn
chirps when the lock button is pressed again within
three seconds. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 4‑72 for additional information.
Pressing Q arms the content theft‐deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3‑23.
With Remote Start
and Liftglass (Without
Remote Start Similar)
With Remote Start
and Power Liftgate
and Liftglass (Without
Remote Start Similar)
3-5
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock only the driver
door. If K is pressed again within three seconds, all
remaining doors unlock. The interior lamps may come
on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is
turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the turn signal lamps flash
twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC
Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑72. If enabled through the DIC, the exterior
lights turn on briefly if it is dark enough outside.
See “APPROACH LIGHTING” under DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4‑72.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
theft‐deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 3‑23.
m (Liftglass): For vehicles with a liftglass, press and
hold to unlock the liftglass.
& (Power Liftgate): For vehicles with a power
liftgate, press and hold to open and close the liftgate.
The taillamps flash and a chime sounds to indicate
when the liftgate is opening and closing.
3-6
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm):
Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds three times.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds.
The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to
ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition must
be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each
transmitter will have a number on it, “1” or “2”.
These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle.
For example, the memory seat position for driver 1
will be recalled when using the transmitter labeled “1”,
if enabled through the DIC. See Memory Seat,
Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2‑10 and DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4‑72
for more information.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased and programmed through your dealer.
When the replacement transmitter is programmed to
this vehicle, all remaining transmitters must also be
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen transmitters will no
longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.
The vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters
programmed to it. See “Relearn Remote Key” under
DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑48 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑55 for instructions on how to
program RKE transmitters to the vehicle.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑61 for additional
information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from
your body could damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object,
such as a flat head screwdriver.
.
Carefully insert the tool into the notch located
along the parting line of the transmitter.
Do not insert the tool too far. Stop as soon
as resistance is felt.
.
Twist the tool until the transmitter is separated.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
3-7
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature.
This feature allows you to start the engine from outside
of the vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle's heating
or air conditioning systems and rear window defogger.
Normal operation of the system will return after the key
is turned to the ON/RUN position.
If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system,
the climate control system will default to a heating or
cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures.
If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate
control system, the system will turn on at the setting the
vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off.
During a remote start, if your vehicle has an automatic
climate control system and heated seats, the heated
seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures
and will shut off when the key is turned to ON/RUN.
3-8
If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate
control system, during remote start, you will need to
manually turn the heated seats on and off. See Heated
Seats on page 2‑8 for additional information.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using the remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range of
operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4 for additional
information.
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following:
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
.
Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter's lock button.
The vehicle's doors will lock. Immediately press
and hold the transmitter's remote start button until
the turn signal lights flash. If you cannot see the
vehicle's lights, press and hold the remote start
button for two to four seconds. Pressing the remote
start button again after the vehicle has started will
turn the engine off.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut
off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has
been done.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine
is still running, to extend the engine running time
by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended
one time.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle.
The vehicle can be remote started two separate times
between driving sequences. The engine will run for
10 minutes after each remote start.
Or, you can extend the engine run time by another
10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time
frame, and before the engine stops.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote start
buttons are pressed again after the vehicle has been
running for five minutes, 10 minutes are added, allowing
the engine to run for 15 minutes.
The additional ten minutes are considered a second
remote vehicle start.
Once two remote starts, or a single remote start with
one time extension has been done, the vehicle must be
started with the key. After the key is removed from the
ignition, the vehicle can be remote started again.
3-9
The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is
in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is an
emission control system malfunction and the check
engine light comes on.
Also, the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle
start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the
oil pressure gets low.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start
system enabled. The system may be enabled or
disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTE START”
under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑72 for additional information. If your vehicle
does not have DIC buttons, see your dealer to enable
or disable the remote vehicle start system.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{ WARNING:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
.
Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. The chance of being thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if
the doors are not locked. So, all passengers
should wear safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked whenever the vehicle
is driven.
.
Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
(Continued)
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature.
This feature allows your dealer to add the
manufacturer's remote vehicle start feature.
See your dealer if you would like to add the
manufacturer's remote vehicle start feature to
your vehicle.
3-10
WARNING: (Continued)
.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the key in the driver's door.
From the inside, use the power door locks or manual
door locks. To lock or unlock the door with the manual
locks, push down or pull up on the manual lock knob.
Power Door Locks
With power door locks, the switches on the front doors
can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle.
" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
to lock the doors.
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the power lock switch
and a door or the liftgate is open, the doors will lock
five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear
three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature
is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch twice will override the
delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the
doors.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
You can program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK
under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑72.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable
you to program the vehicle's power door locks. You can
program this feature through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑72 for more information on DIC
programming.
3-11
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from
the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual
lock, using the power door lock switch, or the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the
vehicle has one.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking the key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door
is open.
The rear doors must be open to access them. The label
showing lock and unlock positions is located near
the lock.
To set the locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
3-12
If the driver's side power door lock switch is pressed
when the driver's door is open and the key is in the
ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the driver's
door will unlock.
If the passenger's side power door lock switch is
pressed when the front passenger's door is open and
the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and
then the front passenger's door will unlock.
Liftgate/Liftglass
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftglass or
liftgate open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas
can come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
If you must drive with the liftglass or liftgate open,
or if electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body and
the liftglass or liftgate:
.
Make sure all other windows are shut.
.
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the
recirculation mode off. That will force outside
air into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System on page 4‑18 or Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on page 4‑20.
(Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
.
If your vehicle has a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
See Engine Exhaust on page 3‑52.
If your vehicle has a power liftgate, see Power Liftgate
on page 3‑15.
To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch or
press the door unlock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter twice. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑5.
3-13
To open the entire liftgate, press the touchpad on the
underside of the liftgate handle (B). The vehicle must be
in PARK (P) to open the liftgate. To close the liftgate,
use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid.
The liftgate or liftglass cannot be opened if the rear
wipers are in motion. Attempting to open the liftgate or
liftglass while the rear wipers are in motion will cause
the release of the liftglass or liftgate to delay until the
wipers are moved off the liftglass.
Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage, the
liftglass and liftgate will not open. The liftglass and
liftgate will resume operation when the battery is
reconnected and charged.
On vehicles with a liftglass, press the button on the
underside of the license pocket applique (A) to open it.
The liftglass can also be opened by pressing the
liftglass release button on the RKE.
3-14
If the battery is properly connected and has adequate
voltage, and the liftgate or liftglass still will not function,
your vehicle should be taken to a dealership for service.
Power Liftgate
Power Liftgate Operation
WARNING: (Continued)
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
{ WARNING:
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate,
or trunk/hatch open:
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
(Continued)
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑52.
On vehicles with a power liftgate the button is located
on the overhead console.
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to use the power
liftgate feature.
& : Press the top of the button to open or close the
power liftgate.
3-15
OFF: Press the bottom of the button for manual
operation of the power liftgate.
The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound when the
power liftgate is moving.
The power liftgate can be power opened and closed in
the following ways:
.
Press and hold the power liftgate button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter until the
liftgate starts moving. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 3‑5 for more
information.
.
Pressing the liftgate button on the overhead
console.
.
Pressing the touchpad switch on the outside
liftgate handle.
{ WARNING:
You or others could be injured if caught in the
path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is no
one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and
closing.
Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for
overhead obstructions such as a garage door, you
could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the area above and
behind the liftgate is clear before opening it.
3-16
Pressing the buttons, or touchpad switch a second time
while the liftgate is moving reverses the direction.
l : The liftgate can also be closed by pressing the
power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch.
Press the button a second time during liftgate operation
to reverse that operation.
The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under
extreme temperatures, or under low battery conditions.
If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated manually.
If you shift the transmission out of P (Park) while the
power function is in progress, the liftgate power function
will continue to completion. If you shift the transmission
out of P (Park) and accelerate before the power liftgate
latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the open
position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always
make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched
before you drive away.
If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support
struts have lost pressure, the lights will flash and a
chime will sound. The liftgate will stay open temporarily,
then slowly close. See your dealer for service before
using the liftgate.
Obstacle Detection Features
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power
open or close cycle, a warning chime will sound and
the liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full
closed or open position. After removing the obstruction,
the power liftgate operation can be used again. If the
liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same
power cycle, the power function will deactivate, and
you must manually open or close the liftgate. The
REAR ACCESS OPEN warning message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will indicate that the liftgate is
open. After removing the obstructions, manually open
the liftgate to the full open position or close the liftgate
to the fully closed and latched position. The liftgate will
now resume normal power operation.
Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on the side
edges of the liftgate. If an object is caught between
the liftgate and the body and presses against this
sensor, the liftgate will reverse direction and open fully.
The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again or
closed manually. Do not force the liftgate open or closed
during a power cycle.
3-17
Manual Operation of Power Liftgate
Power Assist Steps
To change the liftgate to manual operation, press the
switch on the overhead console to the OFF position.
Your vehicle may have power assist steps.
With the power liftgate disabled and all of the doors
unlocked, the liftgate can be manually opened and
closed.
To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the handle
on the outside of the liftgate, and lift the gate open.
To close the liftgate, use the pull cup to lower the
liftgate and close. The liftgate latch will power close.
Always close the liftgate before driving.
If the RKE button or the power close button on the
liftgate is pressed while power operation is disabled, the
lights will flash three times, but the liftgate will not move.
The power assist steps automatically extend from
beneath the vehicle on the side in which the door has
been opened. Once the door is closed, the assist steps
automatically move back under the vehicle after a brief
delay. The vehicle must not be moving for the assist
steps to extend or retract.
The switch used to
disable the power assist
steps is located on the
center console below the
climate control system.
It is not recommended that you drive with the liftgate
open, however, if you must drive with the liftgate open,
the liftgate should be set to manual operation by
pressing the OFF switch on the center console.
The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is
disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate will not
open. The liftgate will resume operation when the
battery is reconnected and charged.
If the battery is properly connected with adequate
voltage, the switch is not disabled, and the liftgate
still will not function, your vehicle should be taken
to a dealer for service.
3-18
The assist steps cannot be disabled in the extended
position.
Windows
{ WARNING:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
3-19
Power Windows
{ WARNING:
The power window
switches are located on
the driver door.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
In addition, each door has a switch for its own window.
The front power window switch operates with two
positions for both up and down movement and the rear
power window switch operates with one position for up
and two positions for down movement. Press the switch
to the first position to lower the window to the desired
level. Pull the switch up to raise the window.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) that
allows you to use the power windows once the ignition
has been turned off. For more information, see Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3‑29.
3-20
Express-Down/Up Windows
Windows with the express feature allow the windows to
be raised and lowered all the way without holding the
switch.
Press or pull the switch fully and release it to activate
the express feature.
The express mode can be canceled at any time by
briefly pressing or pulling the switch.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when the
express‐up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto‐reverse to a preset factory
position. Weather conditions such as severe icing
may also cause the window to auto‐reverse.
The window will return to normal operation once
the obstruction or condition is removed.
Express Window Anti‐Pinch Override
{ WARNING:
If express override is activated, the window will
not reverse automatically. You or others could
be injured and the window could be damaged.
Before you use express override, make sure
that all people and obstructions are clear of the
window path.
In an emergency, the anti‐pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position.
The window will rise for as long as the switch is
held. Once the switch is released, the express
mode is re‐activated.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
3-21
Programming the Power Windows
Window Lockout
If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window for the express-up
feature to work. Before reprogramming, replace or
recharge the vehicle's battery.
o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout button
is located on the driver door near the window switches.
To program each front window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active, close all doors.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window is fully open.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window
is fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely closed.
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process
for the other windows.
Press the right side of the button to disable the rear
window controls. The light on the button will illuminate,
indicating the feature is in use. The rear windows still
can be raised or lowered using the driver window
switches when the lockout feature is active.
To restore power to the rear windows, press the button
again. The light on the button will go out.
Sun Visors
Swing down the visor to block out glare. It can also be
detached from the center mount and moved to the side
to block glare from that direction.
The driver visor may also have buttons for a built-in
garage door opener. See Universal Home Remote
System on page 3‑69 for more information.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the visor down and lift the cover to access the
mirror. A light comes on when the cover is lifted and
goes out when it is closed.
3-22
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they
do not make it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm
system.
This is the security light.
To arm the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or the power door lock switch.
The security light will come on to inform the driver
the system is arming. If a door is open when the
doors are locked, the security light will flash.
If the delayed locking feature is turned on, the
theft‐deterrent system will not start the arming
process until the last door is closed and the delay
timer has expired. See Delayed Locking on
page 3‑11.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
If a locked driver door is opened without using the RKE
transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn
will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key is not placed
in the ignition and turned to START or the door is not
unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter during the ten second pre-alarm, the alarm
will go off. Your vehicle's headlamps will flash and the
horn will sound for about 30 seconds, then will turn off
to save the battery power.
3-23
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors
are locked with the vehicle's key or the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use the power door lock
switch with the door open or the RKE transmitter.
You should also remember that you can start your
vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has
been set off.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
.
If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
.
Always unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the
alarm if it is armed.
If you set off the alarm by accident, press unlock on the
RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and turn
it to START to turn off the alarm. The alarm will not stop
if you try to unlock a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver's window
and open the driver's door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open,
or with the RKE transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the
door with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch will
not work.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 6‑118.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
3-24
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START from
the LOCK/OFF position.
The security light will come on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
If the engine does not start and the security light on
the instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to
start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try
again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 6‑118. If the engine still does
not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service.
If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty.
See your dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+
to have a new key made. In an emergency, contact
Roadside Assistance.
3-25
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer or
a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have
keys made and programmed to the system.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
To program the new additional key:
1. Verify that the new key has a
1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer for service.
3-26
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
the ignition to the LOCK/OFF position in Step 3.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
the new brake linings are not yet broken in.
Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49 for the trailer
towing capabilities of the vehicle and more
information.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
.
Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
.
Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
Following break‐in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
3-27
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission on automatic transmission
vehicles. The key can be removed in LOCK/OFF.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to
left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn't work, then the vehicle needs service.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal must
be applied.
3-28
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets things like
the radio and the windshield wipers operate while the
engine is off. Use this position if the vehicle must be
pushed or towed.
C (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the engine is running.
The transmission is also unlocked in this position
on automatic transmission vehicles.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
D (START): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
.
Audio System
.
Power Windows
.
OnStar® System (if equipped)
.
Sunroof (if equipped)
These features work when the key is in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the windows and sunroof
continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door
is opened. The radio continues to work for up to
10 minutes or until the driver door is opened.
Starting the Engine
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The engine will not start in any other position. To restart
the engine when the vehicle is are already moving,
use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.
3-29
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as the
engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position, and then released
when the engine begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START for many seconds, cranking
will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage,
this system also prevents cranking if the engine is
already running. Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch to the ACC/
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
3-30
2. If the engine does not start after 5‐10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key
in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from the
engine. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the
way the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you do
not, the engine might not perform properly.
Any resulting damage would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
On vehicles with this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals.
Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the
pedals closer to your body. Press the arrow at the top of
the switch to move the pedals away from your body.
No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the
vehicle is in R (Reverse) or while using the cruise
control.
Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to
confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving,
make only small adjustments.
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
the instrument panel
below the climate control
system.
The vehicle may have a memory function which lets
pedal settings be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2‑10 for more
information.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicles
with an engine heater should be plugged in at least
four hours before starting. An internal thermostat in
the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above
−18°C (0°F).
3-31
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is secured to the Engine Compartment
Fuse Block with a clip. Carefully remove the wire
tie which secures the electrical cord. Do not cut the
electrical cord.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
{ WARNING:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away from
moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged
in depends on several factors. Ask a dealer in the area
where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice
on this.
3-32
Active Fuel Management™
Automatic Transmission Operation
Vehicles with V8 engines may have Active Fuel
Management™. This system allows the engine to
operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending
on the driving conditions.
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
half cylinder mode, allowing the vehicle to achieve
better fuel economy. When greater power demands
are required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing,
or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain
full-cylinder operation.
If the vehicle is has an automatic transmission, it has an
electronic shift position indicator within the instrument
panel cluster. This display comes on when the ignition
key is turned to the ON/RUN position.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
If the vehicle has an Active Fuel Management™
indicator, see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑48 or DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 4‑55 for more
information on using this display .
Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed
Automatic Transmission
3-33
{ WARNING:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Heavy Duty 6-Speed Automatic Transmission Shown
(Light Duty Similar)
See “Range Selection Mode” later in this section.
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when starting the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily. When parked on a hill,
especially when the vehicle has a heavy load, you
might notice an increase in the effort to shift out of
P (Park). See Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
under Shifting Into Park on page 3‑49 for more
information.
3-34
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 3‑49. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49.
{ WARNING:
If the vehicle has a four-wheel drive transfer
case with a N (Neutral) position, and the transfer
case is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to
roll — even if the shift lever is in P (Park). Be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear, Two-Wheel
Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive High or
Four-Wheel Drive Low — not in N (Neutral).
See Shifting Into Park on page 3‑49. Always
set the parking brake.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,
use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
{ WARNING:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 5‑29.
3-35
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
.
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
By doing this, the vehicle shifts down to the next
gear and has more power.
D (Drive) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road driving.
You might want to shift the transmission to a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding. See Skidding
under Loss of Control on page 5‑11.
The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that
adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving
conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and
downshifts. This shift stabilization feature is designed
to determine, before making an upshift, if the engine is
able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such
as vehicle speed, throttle position, and vehicle load.
If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current
vehicle speed cannot be maintained, the transmission
does not upshift and instead holds the current gear.
In some cases, this could appear to be a delayed shift,
however the transmission is operating normally.
3-36
The vehicle's transmission uses adaptive shift controls.
Adaptive shift controls continually compares key shift
parameters to pre-programmed ideal shifts stored in the
transmissions computer. The transmission constantly
makes adjustments to improve vehicle performance
according to how the vehicle is being used, such as
with a heavy load or when the temperature changes.
During this adaptive shift control process, shifting might
feel different as the transmission determines the best
settings.
When temperatures are very cold, the Hydra-Matic ®
6-Speed transmission's gear shifting could be delayed
providing more stable shifts until the engine warms
up. Shifts could be more noticeable with a cold
transmission. This difference in shifting is normal.
M (Manual Mode): This position is available on vehicles
with the Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed transmission. It lets
drivers select the range of gears appropriate for current
driving conditions. If the vehicle has this feature,
see Range Select Mode (Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
transmission) later in this section.
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving.
It reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive) without
using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third) instead
of D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads, when
towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears
and when going down a steep hill.
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You can
use 2 (Second) on hills. It can help control vehicle
speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then
you would also want to use the brakes off and on.
If you manually select 2 (Second) in an automatic
transmission, the transmission will start in second gear.
You can use this feature for reducing the speed of the
rear wheels when you are trying to start the vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Range Selection Mode
(Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Transmission)
1 (First): For the Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed transmission
this position reduces vehicle speed even more than
2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can use it
on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift
lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission does not shift into first gear
until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
For a Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed transmission, this position
reduces vehicle speed without using the brakes. You
can use it for major/severe downgrades and off-road
driving where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate
due to steepness of grade. When you shift to 1 (First) it
provides the lowest gear appropriate to the vehicle's
current road speed and continues to downshift as the
vehicle slows, eventually downshifting to 1 (First) gear.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
Base trim shown (uplevel similar)
The vehicle may have a Range Selection Mode.
The Range Selection Mode helps control the vehicle's
transmission and vehicle speed while driving down hill
or towing a trailer by letting you select a desired range
of gears.
3-37
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever to M (Manual Mode).
2. Press the plus/minus buttons, located on the
steering column shift lever, to select the desired
range of gears for the current driving conditions.
When M (Manual Mode) is selected a number displays
next to the M, indicating the current gear.
This number is the highest gear that can be used.
However, the vehicle can automatically shift to lower
gears as it adjusts to driving conditions. This means
that all gears below that number are available. When
5 (Fifth) is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are
automatically shifted by the vehicle, but 6 (Sixth) cannot
be used until the plus/minus button located on the
steering column lever is used to change to the gear.
Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection
Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 3‑39.
3-38
While using Range Selection Mode, cruise control and
the Tow/Haul mode can be used.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Low Traction Mode
If the vehicle has the Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission, it has a Low Traction Mode that assists in
vehicle acceleration when road conditions are slippery,
such as with ice or snow. While the vehicle is at a stop,
select the second gear range using Range Selection
Mode. This will limit torque to the wheels after it detects
wheel slip, preventing the tires from spinning.
Tow/Haul Mode
When Tow/Haul mode is
selected the Tow/Haul
indicator light will
come on.
The Tow/Haul mode works with the Autoride ® feature,
if the vehicle has this, to enhance the ride when
trailering or with a loaded vehicle. See Autoride® on
page 5‑48.
The vehicle has a Tow/Haul mode. The selector button
is located on the end of the column shift lever. You can
use this feature to assist when towing or hauling a
heavy load or if there is a need to charge a battery
installed in a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49
for more information.
3-39
Grade Braking (Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
Automatic Transmission)
Cruise Grade Braking (Hydra-Matic®
6-Speed Automatic Transmission)
The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by
pressing the button on the end of the shift control lever.
While in Range Selection Mode, Grade Braking is
deactivated allowing the driver to select a desired
range of gears.
Cruise Grade Braking assists when driving on
a downhill grade. It maintains vehicle speed by
automatically implementing a shift schedule that
uses the engine and the transmission to slow the
vehicle. Cruise Grade Braking operates while Cruise
Control is engaged in Tow/Haul mode to assist in
maintaining vehicle speed under loaded vehicle
conditions. It utilizes vehicle acceleration and deviation
from desired speed to determine the correct gear for
the operating condition. If vehicle speed is above the
desired speed the transmission will downshift to slow
the vehicle. If vehicle speed is near or below desired
speed the trans will upshift, allowing vehicle speed to
increase.
Grade Braking is only active while the Tow/Haul Mode
is selected and you are not in the Range Selection
Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode listed previously and
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 3‑33
for more information on the Range Selection Mode.
Grade Braking assists in maintaining desired
vehicle speeds when driving on downhill grades
by automatically implementing a shift schedule that
utilizes the engine and transmission to slow the vehicle.
This reduces wear on the braking system and increases
control of the vehicle. Grade Braking monitors vehicle
speed, acceleration, engine torque and brake pedal
usage. Using this information, it detects when the truck
is on a downhill grade and the driver desires to slow
the vehicle by pressing the brake.
Also see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49 for more
information.
3-40
While in the Range Select Mode (RSM) mode, Cruise
Grade Braking is not available.
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 3‑33.
Four-Wheel Drive (Two Speed
Automatic Transfer Case)
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send the
engine's driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. Read the following before using four-wheel
drive.
Automatic Transfer Case
The transfer case knob is
located to the left of the
instrument panel cluster.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive Low for
an extended period of time may cause premature
wear on your vehicle's powertrain. Do not drive on
clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel Drive High or
Four-Wheel Drive Low for extended periods of time.
While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight
turns, you may experience a vibration in the steering
system.
The vehicle has StabiliTrak®. Shifting into
Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control and
StabiliTrak® off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6.
Front Axle
The front axle engages and disengages automatically
when you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the
axle to engage or disengage is normal.
Use this dial to shift into and out of four-wheel drive.
You can choose among five driving settings:
Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting
you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition and the last chosen setting will
stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take
the vehicle to your dealer for service. An indicator light
will flash while shifting. It will stay on when the shift is
completed. If for some reason the transfer case cannot
make a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen
setting.
3-41
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This setting is used for
driving in most street and highway situations. The front
axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. This setting also
provides the best fuel economy.
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is
ideal for use when road surface traction conditions are
variable. When driving your vehicle in AUTO, the front
axle is engaged, but the vehicle's power is primarily
sent to the rear wheels. When the vehicle's software
determines a need for more traction, the system will
transfer more power to the front wheels. Driving in
this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than
Two-Wheel Drive High.
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use the four-wheel
high position when you need extra traction, such as
on snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations.
This setting also engages your front axle to help drive
the vehicle. This is the best setting to use when
plowing snow.
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : This setting also
engages the front axle and delivers extra torque.
You may never need this setting. It sends maximum
power to all four wheels. You might choose Four-Wheel
Drive Low if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep
mud, deep snow, and while climbing or descending
steep hills.
3-42
The vehicle has StabiliTrak®. Shifting into
Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control and
StabiliTrak® off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6.
{ WARNING:
Shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral) can
cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in P (Park). You or someone else could be
seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking brake
before placing the transfer case in N (Neutral).
See Parking Brake on page 3‑48.
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's transfer case
to N (Neutral) only when towing the vehicle.
See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 5‑41
or Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑41 for more
information.
If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message stays on,
you should take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑61.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive High or
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive)
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel High or AUTO
position. This can be done at any speed, except when
shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low. The indicator light
will flash while shifting. It will remain on when the shift is
completed.
Shifting Into Two-Wheel Drive High
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel High position. This can
be done at any speed, except when shifting from
Four-Wheel Drive Low.
See shifting out of Four-Wheel Drive Low later in this
section for more information.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Low
When Four-Wheel Low is engaged, vehicle speed
should be kept below 45 mph (72 km/h). Extended
high-speed operation in 4L may damage or shorten
the life of the drivetrain.
To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position, the
ignition must be in ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the
transmission in N (Neutral). The preferred method for
shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have the
vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the
knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position. You must
wait for the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop
flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission
into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
To help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop
flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
The vehicle may have significant engagement noise
and bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Drive Low
and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or from N (Neutral)
while the engine is running.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel Drive Low
position when the vehicle is in gear and/or moving,
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless the
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the
transmission is in N (Neutral). After 30 seconds the
transfer case will shift to Four-Wheel Drive High mode.
3-43
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel Drive Low
To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low to Four-Wheel Drive
High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High, the vehicle must
be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the
transmission in N (Neutral) and the ignition in ON/RUN.
The preferred method for shifting out of Four-Wheel
Drive Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel
Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High position.
You must wait for the Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,
or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator light to stop flashing
and remain on before shifting the transmission
into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
To help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop
flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
3-44
The vehicle may have significant engagement noise
and bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Drive Low
and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or from N (Neutral)
while the engine is running.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel Drive High,
AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High switch position when
the vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel
Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator
light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the
shift unless the vehicle is moving less than 3 mph
(5 km/h) and the transmission is in N (Neutral).
Shifting into Neutral
To shift the transfer case to N (Neutral) do the following:
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
2. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal. See Parking Brake on page 3‑48 for more
information.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
4. Put the transmission in N (Neutral).
5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel Drive High.
6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to N (Neutral)
until it stops and hold it there until the N (Neutral)
light starts blinking. This will take at least
10 seconds. Then slowly release the dial to the
Four‐Wheel Drive Low position. The N (Neutral)
light will come on when the transfer case shift to
N (Neutral) is complete.
7. If the engine is running, verify that the transfer
case is in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission
to R (Reverse) for one second, then shift the
transmission to D (Drive) for one second.
8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will
turn the engine off.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park).
10. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Shifting Out of Neutral
To shift out of N Neutral do the following:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off,
and shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
3. Turn the transfer case dial to the desired transfer
case shift position (Two-Wheel Drive High,
Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO).
After the transfer case has shifted out of
N (Neutral), the N (Neutral) light will go out.
3-45
4. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
To help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop
flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
5. Start the engine and shift the transmission to the
desired position.
Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the
different modes may cause the transfer case to enter
the shift protection mode. This will protect the transfer
case from possible damage and will only allow the
transfer case to respond to one shift per 10 seconds.
The transfer case may stay in this mode for up to
three minutes.
Four-Wheel Drive (Single Speed
Automatic Transfer Case)
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send the
engine's driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. Read the following before using four-wheel
drive.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel Drive High for an extended period of
time may cause premature wear on the vehicle's
powertrain. Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel Drive High for extended periods of time.
While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight
turns, you may experience a vibration in the steering
system.
Front Axle
The front axle engages and disengages automatically
when you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the
axle to engage or disengage is normal.
3-46
Automatic Transfer Case
The transfer case knob is
located to the left of the
instrument panel cluster.
Use this dial to shift into and out of four-wheel drive.
The vehicle has Four-Wheel-Drive with StabiliTrak ®.
For information on StabiliTrak ®, see StabiliTrak® System
on page 5‑6.
You can choose among three driving settings:
Indicator lights in the switch show you which setting you
are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you
turn on the ignition and the last chosen setting will stay
on. If the lights do not come on, you should take the
vehicle to your dealer for service. An indicator light will
flash while shifting. It will stay on when the shift is
completed. If for some reason the transfer case cannot
make a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen
setting.
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This setting is used for
driving in most street and highway situations. The front
axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. This setting also
provides the best fuel economy.
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is
ideal for use when road surface traction conditions are
variable. When driving the vehicle in AUTO, the front
axle is engaged, but the vehicle's power is primarily
sent to the rear wheels. When the vehicle's software
determines a need for more traction, the system will
transfer more power to the front wheels. Driving in
this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than
Two-Wheel Drive High.
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use the four-wheel
high position when you need extra traction, such as
on snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations.
This setting also engages the front axle to help drive
the vehicle. This is the best setting to use when
plowing snow.
3-47
Service Four Wheel Drive
Parking Brake
If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message stays on,
you should take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑61.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive High or
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive)
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel High or AUTO
position. This can be done at any speed. The indicator
light will flash while shifting. It will remain on when the
shift is completed.
Shifting Into Two-Wheel Drive High
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel High position. This can
be done at any speed. The indicator light will flash while
shifting. It will remain on when the shift is completed.
Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the
different modes may cause the transfer case to enter
the shift protection mode. This will protect the transfer
case from possible damage and will only allow the
transfer case to respond to one shift per 10 seconds.
The transfer case may stay in this mode for up to
three minutes.
3-48
Set the parking brake by holding the regular brake
pedal down, then pushing down the parking brake
pedal.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 4‑36.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before driving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down, then push down momentarily on the
parking brake pedal until you feel the pedal release.
Slowly pull your foot up off the park brake pedal. If the
parking brake is not released when you begin to drive,
the brake system warning light will flash and a chime
will sound warning you that the parking brake is still on.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49.
WARNING: (Continued)
N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even
if the shift lever is in P (Park). So, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
N (Neutral). If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing
a Trailer on page 5‑49. Always set the parking
brake.
Shifting Into Park
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you have a four-wheel drive transfer case with
a N (Neutral) position, and the transfer case is in
(Continued)
1. Hold the brake pedal down, then set the parking
brake.
See Parking Brake on page 3‑48 for more
information.
2. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position by
pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up
as far as it will go.
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in N (Neutral).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand,
the vehicle is in P (Park).
3-49
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set.
If you have four-wheel drive and the transfer case
is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll,
even if the shift lever is in P (Park). So be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
N (Neutral).
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave the
vehicle with the engine running unless you
have to.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you move
3-50
the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal
down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from P (Park) without first pulling it toward you. If you
can, it means that the shift lever was not fully locked
into P (Park).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of P (Park). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the driver
seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park on
page 3‑49.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
then you will be able to pull the shift lever out of
P (Park).
Shifting Out of Park
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
.
.
Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever
is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal is applied.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever all the way into P (Park).
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have the
vehicle serviced soon.
Parking Over Things That Burn
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
{ WARNING:
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
See Jump Starting on page 6‑46 for more information.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things
that can burn.
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
3-51
Engine Exhaust
{ WARNING:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.
The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
.
The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
.
The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
(Continued)
3-52
WARNING: (Continued)
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
.
There are holes or openings in the
vehicle body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.
Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{ WARNING:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen
or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed
area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more
information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3‑52.
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle
when the engine is running unless you have to.
(Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
the parking brake and move the shift lever to
P (Park).
{ WARNING:
If the vehicle has a four-wheel drive transfer case
with a N (Neutral) position, and the transfer case
is in N (Neutral), the vehicle may roll, even if the
automatic transmission shift lever is in P (Park).
So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in N (Neutral). Always set the
parking brake.
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 3‑49.
If pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49.
3-53
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror
to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you. Push the
tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons for the OnStar® system. See your dealer for
more information about OnStar® and how to subscribe
to it. See the OnStar® owner's guide for more
information about the services OnStar® provides.
O (On/Off):
Press to turn the dimming feature on or off.
The vehicle may also have a Rear Vision Camera
(RVC). See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on page 3‑64
for more information.
If the vehicle has RVC, the O (On/Off) button for
turning the automatic dimming feature on or off will
not be available.
3-54
Automatic dimming reduces the glare from the
headlamps of the vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates
each time the ignition is turned to start.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.
Use a soft towel dampened with water.
Outside Manual Mirrors
Adjust the outside mirror for a clearer view.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
Using hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on convex
mirror attachments could decrease mirror performance.
Outside Towing Mirrors
Outside Power Mirrors
Vehicles with outside
power mirrors have the
controls on the driver door
armrest.
If the vehicle has towing mirrors, they can be adjusted
for a clearer view of the objects behind you. Manually
pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility
when towing a trailer.
Manually fold the mirrors forward or rearward. The lower
portion of the mirror is convex. A convex mirror's
surface is curved to see more from the driver seat.
The convex mirror can be adjusted manually to the
driver preferred position for better vision.
The mirror may have a turn signal arrow that flashes in
the direction of the turn or lane change.
To adjust each mirror:
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver or passenger
side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
4. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.
The mirrors may also include a memory function that
works with the memory seats. See Memory Seat,
Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2‑10 for more information.
3-55
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
Vehicles with outside
power foldaway mirrors
have the controls located
on the driver door
armrest.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
.
The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while
folding.
.
They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
.
The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
.
The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
Fold and unfold them one time using the mirror controls
to reset them to their normal position.
Turn Signal Indicator
The vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on the
mirror. An arrow on the mirror flashes in the direction
of the turn or lane change.
Ground Illumination Lamps
Mirror Adjustment
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded
position.
3-56
The mirrors may also include ground illumination lamps
in the base of the mirror. These lamps help to see
the area near the base of the front doors when it is
dark out.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
Vehicles with this feature have a driver outside mirror
that adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind you.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 3‑54
for more information.
Park Tilt Mirrors
Vehicles with the memory package have a passenger
and/or driver mirror that tilts to a preselected position
when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This feature lets the
driver view the curb when parallel parking. The mirror(s)
return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted
out of R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned off.
Turn this feature on or off through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑72 for more information.
Outside Convex Mirror
{ WARNING:
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver seat.
3-57
Outside Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on page 4‑20 or Climate
Control System on page 4‑18 for more information.
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, see Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 3‑60.
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system, it operates at speeds less than
8 km/h (5 mph), and assists the driver with parking and
avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). The sensors on
the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to an
object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least
25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground.
{ WARNING:
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
3-58
.
Objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
.
Children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
(Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the
vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure
to look for objects and check the vehicle's mirrors.
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever
is moved into R (Reverse). A single tone sounds to
indicate the system is working.
URPA operates only at speeds less than
5 mph (8 km/h).
An obstacle is indicated by audible beeps. The interval
between the beeps becomes shorter as the vehicle gets
closer to the obstacle. When the distance is less than
30 cm (12 in) the beeps are continuous.
To be detected, objects must be at least 25.4 cm (10 in)
off the ground and below liftgate level. Objects must
also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear bumper. This
distance may be less during warmer or humid weather.
The system can be
disabled by pressing the
rear park aid disable
button located next to
the radio.
The indicator light will come on and PARK ASSIST OFF
displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
indicate that URPA is off, see DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑61.
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary
condition, the messages PARK ASSIST OFF or PARK
ASST BLOCKED SEE OWNERS MANUAL will be
displayed on the DIC.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this message occurs, take
the vehicle to your dealer to repair the system.
PARK ASSIST OFF: This message occurs if the driver
disables the system.
3-59
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE OWNERS MANUAL:
This message can occur under the following conditions:
.
The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the
vehicle's rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice
and slush. For cleaning instructions, see Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6‑112.
.
The park assist sensors are covered by frost or
ice. Frost or ice can form around and behind the
sensors and may not always be seen; this can
occur after washing the vehicle in cold weather.
The message may not clear until the frost or ice
has melted.
.
A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle
or an object was hanging out of the liftgate during
the last drive cycle. Once the attached object is
removed, URPA will return to normal operation.
.
A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.
.
The vehicle's bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer to repair the system.
.
Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 40 km/h (25 mph), take the vehicle to your dealer.
3-60
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
The vehicle may have a Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system. Read this entire section before using the
system.
{ WARNING:
SBZA is only a lane changing aid and does not
replace driver vision. SBZA does not detect:
.
Vehicles outside the side blind zones which
may be rapidly approaching.
.
Pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Failure to use proper care when changing lanes
may result in damage to the vehicle, injury,
or death. Always check the outside and rearview
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the
turn signal before changing lanes.
When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind
zone, amber SBZA displays light up in the side mirrors.
This indicates that it may be unsafe to change lanes.
Before making a lane change, always check the SBZA
display, check the outside and rearview mirrors, look
over your shoulder for vehicles and hazards, and use
the turn signal.
Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer,
as the SBZA detection zones do not change when a
trailer is towed.
How the System Works
Left Side Mirror Display
SBZA Detection Zones
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of approximately one
lane over from both sides of the vehicle, 3.5 m (11 ft).
This zone starts at each side mirror and goes back
approximately 5.0 m (16 ft). The height of the zone is
approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2.0 m (6 ft) off
the ground.
Right Side Mirror Display
When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror displays
will briefly come on to indicate that the system is
operating. When the vehicle is moving forward, the left
or right side mirror SBZA display will light up if a vehicle
is detected in that blind zone. If the turn signal is
activated and a vehicle is also detected on the same
side, the SBZA display will flash to give you extra
warning not to change lanes.
3-61
SBZA displays do not come on while the vehicle is
approaching or passing other vehicles. At speeds
greater then 32 km/h (20 mph), SBZA displays may
come on when a vehicle you have passed remains in
or drops back into the detection zone.
SBZA is designed to ignore stationary objects; however,
the system may occasionally light up due to guard rails,
signs, trees, shrubs, and other stationary objects. This
is normal system operation, the vehicle does not need
service.
SBZA can be disabled through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑47 for more information. If the SBZA is disabled
by the driver, the SBZA mirror displays will not light up
during normal driving.
SBZA does not operate when the left or right corners of
the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions,
see Washing Your Vehicle on page 6‑112. If the DIC still
displays the SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS. UNAVAILABLE
message after cleaning the bumper, see your dealer.
When the System Does Not Seem To Work
Properly
Occasional missed alerts can occur under normal
circumstances and will increase in wet conditions.
The system does not need to be serviced due to an
occasional missed alert. The number of missed alerts
will increase with increased rainfall or road spray.
If the SBZA displays do not light up when the system is
on and vehicles are in the blind zone, the system may
need service. Take the vehicle to your dealer.
3-62
The SBZA displays may remain on if a trailer is
attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or object is
extending out to either side of the vehicle.
When SBZA is disabled for any reason other than the
driver turning it off, the driver will not be able to turn
SBZA back on using the DIC. The SIDE BLIND ZONE
ALERT ON option will not be selectable if the conditions
for normal system operation are not met. Until normal
operating conditions for SBZA are met, you should not
rely upon SBZA while driving.
SBZA Error Messages
FCC Information
The following messages may appear in the DIC:
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19 for FCC
information.
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF: This
message indicates that the driver has turned the
system off.
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS. UNAVAILABLE: This
message indicates that the SBZA system is disabled
either because the sensor is blocked and cannot
detect vehicles in your blind zone, or the vehicle is
passing through an open field of view area, such as the
desert, where there is insufficient data for operation.
The sensor may be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,
slush, or even heavy rainstorms. This message may
also activate during heavy rain or due to road spray.
The vehicle does not need service. For cleaning, see
Washing Your Vehicle on page 6‑112.
Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz
Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m peak
(0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3m
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV
interference caused by unauthorized modifications to
this equipment. Such modifications could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM: If this
message appears, both SBZA displays will remain on
indicating there is a problem with the SBZA system.
If these displays remain on after continued driving, the
system needs service. Take the vehicle to your dealer.
3-63
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
Vehicles Without Navigation System
This vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system.
Read this entire section before using it.
The rear vision camera system is designed to help
the driver when backing up by displaying a view of
the area behind the vehicle. When the key is in the
ON/RUN position and the driver shifts the vehicle into
R (Reverse), the video image automatically appears on
the inside rear view mirror. Once the driver shifts out of
R (Reverse), the video image automatically disappears
from the inside rear view mirror.
{ WARNING:
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) system does not
replace driver vision. RVC does not:
.
Detect objects that are outside the camera's
field of view, below the bumper, or underneath
the vehicle.
.
Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
or pets.
Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the
RVC screen, or use the screen during longer,
higher speed backing maneuvers or where there
could be cross-traffic. Your judged distances using
the screen will differ from actual distances.
So if you do not use proper care before backing
up, you could hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in vehicle damage,
injury, or death. Even though the vehicle has
the RVC system, always check carefully before
backing up by checking behind and around the
vehicle.
3-64
Turning the Rear Vision Camera System
Off or On
To turn off the rear vision camera system, press and
hold z, located on the inside rearview mirror, until the
left indicator light turns off. The rear camera vision
display is now disabled.
To turn the rear vision camera system on again, press
and hold z until the left indicator light illuminates.
The rear vision camera system display is now enabled
and the display will appear in the mirror normally.
Vehicles With Navigation System
The rear vision camera system is designed to help
the driver when backing up by displaying a view of the
area behind the vehicle. When the driver shifts the
vehicle into R (Reverse), the video image automatically
appears on the navigation screen. Once the driver shifts
out of R (Reverse), the navigation screen will go back to
the last screen that had been displayed, after a delay.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera System
On or Off
To turn the rear vision camera system on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the MENU button to enter the configure
menu options, then press the MENU hard key to
select Display or touch the Display screen button.
3. Select the Rear Camera Options screen button.
The Rear Camera Options screen will display.
4. Select the Video screen button. When the Video
screen button is highlighted the RVC system is on.
The delay that is received after shifting out of
R (Reverse) is approximately 10 seconds. The delay
can be cancelled by performing one of the following:
.
Pressing a hard key on the navigation system.
.
Shifting in to P (Park).
.
Reach a vehicle speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
There is a message on the rear vision camera screen
that states “Check Surroundings for Safety”.
3-65
Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of
the Screen
To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen,
press the MENU button while the rear vision camera
image is on the display. Any adjustments made will only
affect the rear vision camera screen.
] (Brightness) :
Touch the + (plus) or – (minus)
screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness
of the screen.
_ (Contrast) :
Touch the + (plus) or – (minus) screen
buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the
screen.
Symbols
The navigation system may have a feature that lets the
driver view symbols on the navigation screen while
using the rear vision camera. The Ultrasonic Rear Park
Assist (URPA) system must not be disabled to use the
caution symbols. If URPA has been disabled and the
symbols have been turned on, the Rear Parking Assist
Symbols Unavailable error message may display. See
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 3‑58.
3-66
The symbols appear when an object has been detected
by the URPA system. The symbol may cover the object
when viewing the navigation screen.
To turn the symbols on or off:
1. Make sure that URPA has not been disabled.
2. Shift into P (Park).
3. Press the MENU hard key to enter the configure
menu options, then press the MENU hard key
repeatedly until Display is selected or touch the
Display screen button.
4. Select the Rear Camera Options screen button.
The Rear Camera Options screen will display.
5. Touch the Symbols screen button. The screen
button will be highlighted when on.
Rear Vision Camera Error Messages
Service Rear Vision Camera System: This message
can display when the system is not receiving
information it requires from other vehicle systems.
If any other problem occurs or if a problem persists, see
your dealer.
Rear Vision Camera Location
The image is provided by the camera located above the
license plate.
The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen differs from the actual
distance. The area displayed by the camera is limited.
The camera does not display objects which are close
to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper.
The area displayed on the screen can vary according
to vehicle orientation or road conditions.
A. View displayed by the camera.
B. Corner of the rear bumper.
The following illustration shows the field of view that the
camera provides.
3-67
When the System Does Not Seem To
Work Properly
The rear vision camera system might not work properly
or display a clear image if:
.
The RVC is turned off. See “Turning the Rear
Camera System On or Off” earlier in this section.
.
It is dark.
.
The sun or the beam of headlights is shining
directly into the camera lens.
.
Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the
camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water,
and wipe it with a soft cloth.
.
The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the
position and mounting angle of the camera can
change or the camera can be affected. Be sure to
have the camera and its position and mounting
angle checked at your dealer.
The rear vision camera system display in the rearview
mirror may turn off or not appear as expected due to
one of the following conditions. If this occurs the left
indicator light on the mirror will flash.
.
A slow flash may indicate a loss of video signal,
or no video signal present during the reverse cycle.
.
A fast flash may indicate that the display has
been on for the maximum allowable time during a
reverse cycle, or the display has reached an Over
Temperature limit.
The fast flash conditions are used to protect the
video device from high temperature conditions.
Once conditions return to normal the device will
reset and the green indicator will stop flashing.
During any of these fault conditions, the display will be
blank and the indicator will continue to flash as long as
the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or until the conditions
return to normal.
Pressing and holding z when the left indicator light is
flashing will turn off the video display along with the left
indicator light.
3-68
Universal Home Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This
includes any garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. Only the original remote control
transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming.
The programmed buttons should be erased when
the vehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing
Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home
Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that
is being programmed.
3-69
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out
and the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
3-70
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit and may be a colored button.
Press this button. After pressing this button,
complete the following steps in less than
30 seconds.
3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be
used to control the garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may need
to be held for up to 20 seconds.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program another Rolling Code device such as
an additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than what
was used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
3-71
To program up to three devices:
1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of
the garage door opener motor. If there are a row
of dip switches similar to the graphic above, the
garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you
do not see a row of dip switches, return to the
previous section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Your hand held transmitter can have between eight
to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
3-72
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the
motor head and hand held transmitter are different,
or if the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program the Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when
the original hand held transmitter is not available.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should be
similar.
.
When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
.
When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”
.
If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 now
become the button strokes to be entered into
the Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure
to enter the switch settings written down in
Step 2, in order from left to right, into the
Universal Home Remote, when completing
Step 4.
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
.
A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
.
A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
.
A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
3-73
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected
button should slowly blink. This button may need
to be held for up to 55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle's
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press
one button on the Universal Home Remote for
each switch setting as follows:
3-74
.
If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
.
If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in
the vehicle.
.
If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for the
garage door opener.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come on while
the signal is being transmitted.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
Cupholders
For vehicles with cupholders located in the front and
rear of the floor console or in the fold down armrest,
adjust the front cupholders by moving the insert forward
or rearward.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lights, located directly above the buttons,
begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release
both buttons. The codes from all buttons will be
erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 8‑6.
Pull downward on the lid to access the rear floor
console cupholders.
3-75
There could also be cupholders located in the second
and third row seat armrest areas.
Center Console Storage
For vehicles with a console compartment, it is located
between the bucket seats.
Press the button and lift the lid to access the console
compartment.
A cupholder located in the rear of the console, swings
down for the rear seat passenger to use.
Roof Rack System
{ WARNING:
If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is
longer or wider than the roof rack— like paneling,
plywood, or a mattress— the wind can catch it
while the vehicle is being driven. The item being
carried could be violently torn off, and this could
cause a collision, and damage the vehicle. Never
carry something longer or wider than the roof rack
on top of the vehicle unless using a GM Certified
accessory carrier.
3-76
For vehicles with a roof rack, the rack can be used to
load items. For roof racks that do not have crossrails
included, GM Certified crossrails can be purchased as
an accessory. See your dealer for additional
information.
Notice: Loading cargo on the roof rack that weighs
more than 91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the rear or
sides of the vehicle may damage the vehicle. Load
cargo so that it rests evenly between the crossrails,
making sure to fasten cargo securely.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo when driving,
check to make sure crossrails and cargo are securely
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof rack will make the
vehicle’s center of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt
maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control.
If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high
speeds, occasionally stop the vehicle to make sure the
cargo remains in its place.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑31.
.
.
If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, cut a
piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails
and siderails to spread the load. Tie the plywood to
the siderail supports.
Tie the load and secure it to the crossrails or the
siderail supports. Use the crossrails only to keep
the load from sliding. To move a crossrail, lift the
release lever up, on both sides of the rail. Then
slide the crossrail to the desired position balancing
the force side to side. Press the release lever
down on both sides of the rail, down to tighten it.
Try to slide the crossrail back and forth slightly to
make sure it is tight.
.
To carry long items, move the crossrails as far
apart as possible. Tie the load to the crossrails and
the siderails or siderail supports. Also tie the load
to the bumpers, but do not tie the load so tightly
that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.
.
After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely
locked into the siderail.
A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) is located
above the rear window glass.
Make sure items loaded on the roof of the vehicle do
not block or damage the CHMSL.
Rear Storage Area
For vehicles with a rear storage area, it is located in the
rear cargo area of the vehicle on the driver's side trim
panel.
Turn the knobs and swing the storage door to access
the storage compartment. The door can be removed.
Rear Seat Armrest
For vehicles with a rear seat armrest, pull the loop at
the top of the armrest down to access the cupholders.
3-77
Cargo Cover
To remove the cover from a regular wheelbase model:
1. Let the cover go all the way into the holder.
{ WARNING:
2. Then, grasping the driver's side cover end cap,
push the cover end cap toward the passenger side
of the vehicle.
An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown
about the vehicle during a collision or sudden
maneuver. Someone could be injured. If the cover
is removed, always store it in the proper storage
location. When it is replaced, always be sure that
it is securely reattached.
3. Swing the cover rearward and take it out of the
vehicle.
To use the cargo cover, if equipped:
1. Pull the cover handle toward the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Latch the cover posts into the retaining sockets on
the cargo area trim panels.
To return the cover to the retracted position:
1. Pull up on the cover handle to release the cover
posts from the retaining sockets.
2. Let the cover move forward to the full retracted
position.
3-78
To put the cover in the vehicle:
1. Make sure the cover slot in the holder faces
rearward with the round surface facing down.
2. Then, hold the cover at an angle and place the
cover end cap into the slot in the passenger side
trim panel.
3. Move the other end of the cover forward and hold it
next to the driver's side trim panel slot.
4. Press the end caps in, to allow the cover to fit into
the trim slot.
5. Pull lightly on the cover holder to make sure it is
secure.
On extended wheelbase models there are two
cover positions. The slots furthest forward allow
the cover to be used if the third seat is removed
or folded down. The cover can be installed and
removed from either side.
Sunroof
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close the sunroof, the ignition
needs to be turned to ON/RUN, or Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) must be active. When RAP is active,
the sunroof will work for 10 minutes after the ignition is
turned off, or until a front door is opened. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3‑29 for more
information.
There are two switches in
the overhead console that
operate the sunroof.
Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the sunroof
press and hold the rear of the driver's side switch until
the sunroof reaches the desired position. To close the
sunroof, press and hold the front of the driver's side
switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position.
The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof,
but can also be opened manually.
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the
sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From the
comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver's side
switch a second time to open the sunroof to the
full-open position.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open the
sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the driver's
side switch. The sunroof will open automatically. To stop
the sunroof partway, press the switch a second time.
To express-close the sunroof, fully press and release
the front of the driver's side switch. The sunroof will
close automatically. To stop the sunroof partway, press
the switch a second time. The sunshade will open
automatically with the sunroof, but can also be opened
manually.
3-79
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the
sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From the
comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver's side
switch a second time to open the sunroof to the
full-open position.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
Vent: The sunroof has an express-vent open feature.
From the closed position, press the rear of the
passenger's side switch to vent the sunroof. To stop
the sunroof partway, press the switch a second time.
To close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the
passenger's side switch. To stop the sunroof partway,
release the switch.
3-80
Anti-Pinch Feature: If an object is in the path
of the sunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature
will detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing
at the point of the obstruction. The sunroof will then
open halfway, and the air deflector will raise. To close
the sunroof once it has re-opened, refer to the
“Express-Close” or “Manual-Close” functions described
previously. If the sunroof is in the vent position, and
there is an object in the path of the sunroof when it
closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object
and stop the sunroof. To close the sunroof once
it has re-opened, refer to the “Manual-Close” or
“Express-Close” functions described previously.
Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the
tracks that could cause an issue with sunroof operation,
noise or plug the water drainage system. Periodically
open the sunroof and remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from sunroof.
Section 4
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Headlamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Instrument Panel Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Dome Lamp Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Battery Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessory Power Outlet(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Automatic Climate Control System . . . . . . .
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System . . . .
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and
Electronic Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light . . .
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-18
4-20
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-30
4-31
4-31
4-31
4-31
4-32
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-36
4-37
4-38
4-38
4-1
Section 4
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC
Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIC Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Instrument Panel
4-39
4-39
4-43
4-44
4-44
4-45
4-45
4-45
4-45
4-46
4-47
4-47
4-48
4-55
4-58
4-61
4-72
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Using an MP3 (Radios with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Using an MP3 (Radios with CD and DVD) . . . . 4-106
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Navigation/Radio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System . . . . . . 4-125
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Rear Side Window Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . 4-140
Instrument Panel Overview
Tilt Wheel
Hazard Warning Flashers
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on top of the steering column, to make the front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble. Press again to turn
the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle's
turn signals will not work.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
wheel.
The tilt lever is located on the lower left side of the
steering column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever.
2. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable position.
3. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G : Turn and Lane Change Signals
5 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
N : Windshield Wipers
L : Windshield Washer
5 : Rear Wiper Delay
Z : Rear Wiper
= : Rear Wiper Wash
Flash-to-Pass.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
4-4
Raise or lower the lever for less than one second until
the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. This
causes the turn signals to automatically flash three
times. It will flash six times if tow-haul mode is active.
Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second
will cause the turn signals to flash until you release the
lever.
The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows
flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be
burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 6‑118.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If the turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn
signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will also
appear in the Driver Information Control (DIC). To turn
the chime and message off, move the turn signal lever
to the off position.
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic
position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, the high-beam headlamps will turn on. They
will stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster
will come on. Release the lever to return to normal
operation.
53 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): To
change the headlamps from low to high beam, push
the lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward
you. Then release it.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
4-5
Windshield Wipers
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced.
See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 6‑61.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Windshield Washer
{ WARNING:
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.
8 (Mist):
Single wipe, turn to 8, then release.
Several wipes, hold the band on 8 longer.
9 (Off): Turns the windshield wipers off.
6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Turn the band up for
more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes.
6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
? (High Speed): Fast wipes.
4-6
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle marked with
the windshield washer symbol at the top of the
multifunction lever, to spray washer fluid on the
windshield. The wipers clear the window and then
either stop or return to the preset speed.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
{ WARNING:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
The rear wiper control is located on the turn signal/
multifunction lever.
To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to a wiper
position.
9 (Off): Turns the wiper off.
5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Turns on the rear wiper delay.
Z (Rear Wiper): Turns on the rear wiper.
= (Rear Wiper Wash): To turn on the rear wiper
wash, push the button on the end of the turn signal/
multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the rear
window. The wipers will clear the rear window and
either stop or return to your preset speed. For more
washer cycles, press and hold the button.
The rear window wiper/washer will not operate if the
liftgate or liftglass is open or ajar. If the liftgate or
liftglass is opened while the rear wiper is on, the
wiper will return to the parked position and stop.
Cruise Control
{ WARNING:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
With cruise control, a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
When the brakes are applied, cruise control is
turned off.
4-7
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, and the system begins
to limit wheel spin, cruise control will automatically
disengage. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6.
When road conditions allow the cruise control to be
safely used again, it can be turned back on.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
SET − (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed and activate
cruise control or make the vehicle decelerate.
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage cruise control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control
If the cruise button is on when not in use, it could get
bumped and go into cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control switch off when cruise is not being used.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on after the cruise control has been set to the
desired speed.
1. Press
I button to turn the cruise control on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
I (On/Off):
Turns the system on or off. The indicator
light is on when cruise control is on and turns off when
cruise control is off.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press briefly to make the
vehicle resume to a previously set speed, or press and
hold to accelerate.
4-8
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then
the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged
without erasing the set speed from memory.
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more, press the +RES button on the
steering wheel. The vehicle returns to the previously
set speed and stays there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control system is already activated,
.
Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
release it.
.
To increase vehicle speed in small amounts,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control system is already activated,
.
.
Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
To slow down in small amounts, press the SET–
button on the steering wheel briefly. Each time this
is done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph)
slower.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift
to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down. When
the brakes are applied the cruise control turns off.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
.
To disengage cruise control; step lightly on the
brake pedal.
.
Press
.
To turn off the cruise control, press
steering wheel.
[
on the steering wheel.
I on the
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is erased from memory by
pressing the I button or if the ignition is turned off.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed.
4-9
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps
control is located on the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the
headlamps at normal brightness, together with the
following:
.
Parking Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
It controls the following systems:
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Headlamps
.
Taillamps
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Parking Lamps
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together with
the following lamps listed below.
.
Parking Lamps
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
.
Instrument Panel Lights
O (Off):
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
Turns off the automatic headlamps and
daytime running lamps (DRL). Turning the headlamp
control to the off position again turns the automatic
headlamps or DRL back on.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position only
works for vehicles that are shifted into the P (Park)
position.
4-10
When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is
on, the headlamps will turn off automatically 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps are
turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will
stay on for 10 minutes before automatically turning off
to prevent the battery from being drained. Turn the
headlamp control to off and then back to the headlamp
on position to make the headlamps stay on for an
additional 10 minutes.
Headlamps on Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when the headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on and the ignition
is off and a door is open. To disable the chime, turn the
light off.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on
all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system comes on when the following
conditions are met:
.
The ignition is on.
.
The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
.
The engine is running.
.
The light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL system is on, only the DRL lamps are
on. The taillamps, sidemarker, instrument panel lights,
and other lamps will not be on.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system switches from DRL to the headlamps.
To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the exterior lamps
control to the OFF position and then release.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission
must be in the P (Park) position, before the DRL lamps
can be turned off.
4-11
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic
headlamp system turns on the headlamps at the
normal brightness, along with the taillamps, sidemarker,
parking lamps, and the instrument panel lights.
The radio lights will also be dim.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn
the exterior lamps switch to the off position and
then release it. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the
transmission must be in the P (Park) position, before
the automatic headlamp system can be turned off.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel in the defroster grille that regulates
when the automatic headlamps turn on. Do not cover
the sensor or the headlamps will come on whenever
the ignition is on.
driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights
does not affect the system. The DRL and automatic
headlamp system is only affected when the light sensor
detects a change in lighting lasting longer than the
delay.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is bright enough outside. During that
delay, the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 4‑14.
To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system
off, turn the control to the off position.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
The headlamps will also stay on after you exit the
vehicle. This feature can be programmed using the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4‑72.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so that
The regular headlamp system can be turned on when
needed.
4-12
Fog Lamps
Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp
For vehicles with fog lamps, the control is located next
to the exterior lamps control on the instrument panel, to
the left of the steering column.
If the vehicle has this feature, this button includes wiring
provisions for a dealer or a qualified service center to
install an auxiliary roof lamp.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the fog
lamps to come on.
This button is located on
the overhead console.
# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the fog lamps on or off.
A light will come on in the instrument panel cluster.
When the fog lamps are turned on, the parking lamps
automatically turn on.
When the headlamps are changed to high-beam, the
fog lamps also go off. When the high-beam headlamps
are turned off, the fog lamps will come on again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof
mounted lamp, pressing the bottom of the button will
activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light at the
bottom of this button. Pressing the top of the button will
turn off the roof mounted lamp and indicator.
4-13
The emergency roof lamp circuit is fused at 30 amps,
so the total current draw of the attached lamps should
be less than this value. The attachment points for the
roof lamp circuits are two blunt cut wires located above
the overhead console, a dark green switched power
wire and a black ground wire.
For further information on roof mount emergency lamp
installation, please visit the GM Upfitter website at
www.gmupfitters.com or contact your dealer.
If the vehicle has this button, the vehicle may have
the snow plow prep package. For further information
see Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on
page 5‑37.
Instrument Panel Brightness
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature
controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights
and is located next to the exterior lamp control.
Push the knob to extend out and then it can be turned.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten
or dim the instrument panel lights. Turning the knob to
the farthest clockwise position turns on the dome lamps.
4-14
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning
the instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the
dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or
closed.
Dome Lamp Override
The dome lamp override button is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
k (Dome Off): Press the button in and the dome
lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the
button again to return it to the extended position so that
the dome lamps come on when a door is opened.
Entry Lighting
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has an illuminated entry feature.
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will
come on if the dome override button is in the extended
position. If the dome override button is pressed in, the
lamps will not come on.
Exit Lighting
The interior lamps come on when the key is removed
from the ignition. They turn off automatically in
20 seconds. The lights do not come on if the dome
override button is pressed in.
Reading Lamps
For vehicles with reading lamps they are located on the
overhead console.
To turn on the reading lamps, press the button located
next to each lamp. To turn them off, press the button
again.
The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn the lamps on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp.
When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage
is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gauge or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads,
and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted.
4-15
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,
without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest
levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable
to the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or
LOW BATTERY. If this message is displayed, it is
recommended that the driver reduce the electrical
loads as much as possible. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑61.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, and reading lamps
if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when
the ignition is off. This will keep the battery from
running down.
4-16
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
There are two under the climate controls, one inside the
center floor console, one on the rear of the center floor
console and one accessory power outlet in the rear
cargo area on the passenger side.
To use an accessory power outlet, remove the
protective cap. When not in use, always cover the
accessory power outlet with the protective cap.
The accessory power outlets are powered, even with
the ignition off. Continuing to use accessory power
outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/OFF may cause
the vehicle's battery to run down.
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged into
a power outlet, the battery may drain causing the
vehicle not to start or damage to the battery.
This would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always unplug all electrical devices when turning
off the vehicle.
Certain accessory plugs may not be compatible to
the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
adapter or vehicle fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer for additional information on the
accessory power plugs.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are
put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with the
equipment. Do not use equipment exceeding the
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
The front ashtray is located near the center of the
instrument panel or on the front console, if equipped.
Pull on the ashtray door to open it.
To remove the front ashtray pull the ashtray up.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
4-17
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
Temperature Control: Move the thumbwheels up or
down to increase or decrease the temperature on the
driver's side or the passenger side of the vehicle for the
dual zone system.
9 (Fan Control):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
speed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise
to turn the front system off.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the airflow direction inside
the vehicle. By positioning the knob between two
modes, a combination of those modes is selected.
Select from the following modes:
H (Vent):
Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
A. Fan Control
E. Air Conditioning
B. REAR
F. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
C. Recirculation
D. Air Delivery Mode
Control
4-18
G. Rear Window Defogger
Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets. Some air is directed towards
the windshield and side window outlets. Cooler air is
directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor
outlets.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some of the air directed to the windshield, side window,
and second row floor outlets. In this mode, the system
automatically selects outside air. Recirculation cannot
be selected when in Floor Mode.
- (Defog):
The defog mode is used to clear the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents. In this
mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature
is close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defog mode.
0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is used to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly. Air is directed
to the windshield and side window vents, with some
directed to the floor vents. In this mode, the system
automatically forces outside air into the vehicle.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in
the defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor
runs automatically in this setting, unless the outside
temperature is close to freezing.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
# (Air Conditioning):
Press this button to turn the
air conditioning system on or off. An indicator light
comes on to show that the air conditioning is on.
The air conditioning can be selected in any mode
as long as the fan switch is on.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
h (Recirculation):
Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode on or off. An indicator light comes
on to show that recirculation is on.
This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the
air inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,
defrost, or defogging modes. If recirculation is selected
while in one of those modes, the indicator flashes three
times and turns off. The air conditioning compressor
will also come on when this mode is activated. While
in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the
weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, select either
the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed.
The recirculation mode can also be turned off by turning
off the engine.
REAR: Press to turn the rear heating and air
conditioning on. See Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System on page 4‑27 or Rear Air Conditioning and
Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls on
page 4‑28 for more information.
4-19
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
If this vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. The system
automatically turns off several minutes after it has been
activated. The defogger can also be turned off by
turning off the engine. Do not drive the vehicle until
all the windows are clear.
For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirrors,
the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button
is pressed.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can
be controlled with this system. The vehicle also has a
flow-through ventilation system described later in this
section.
4-20
A. Fan Control
B. AUTO
H. Display
I. Power Button
C. Defrost
J. Rear Window Defogger
D. Recirculation
K. Air Conditioning
E. REAR
L. PASS
F. Air Delivery Mode
Control
M. Passenger Temperature
Control
G. Driver Temperature
Control
O (On/Off): Press to turn the climate control
system on or off. Outside air still enters the vehicle,
and is directed to the floor. This direction can be
changed by pressing the mode button. Recirculation
can be selected once you have selected vent or bi-level
mode. The temperature can also be adjusted using
either temperature button. If the air delivery mode or
temperature settings are adjusted with the system off,
the display illuminates briefly to show the settings and
then returns to off. The system can be turned back on
by pressing either O, D, C, #, the defrost or the AUTO
button.
Driver and Passenger Side Temperature
Control
The driver and passenger side temperature buttons
are used to adjust the temperature of the air coming
through the system on the driver or passenger's side of
the vehicle. The temperature can be adjusted even if
the system is turned off. This is possible since outside
air always flows through the system as the vehicle is
moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the
cabin temperature. The driver side or passenger side
temperature display shows the temperature setting
decreasing or increasing.
The passenger's temperature setting can be set to
match the driver's temperature setting by pressing the
PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator. When
the passenger's temperature setting is set different than
the driver's setting, the indicator on the PASS button
illuminates and both the driver side and passenger side
temperature displays are shown.
When in defrost mode the passenger temperature
setting cannot be changed.
4-21
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is active
the system will control the inside temperature, the air
delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current temperature(s) and AUTO will be
lit on the display. The current delivery mode and
fan speed will also be displayed for approximately
5 seconds.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor
will run when the outside temperature is over
about 4°C (40°F). The air inlet will normally be
set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet
may automatically switch to recirculate inside air
to help quickly cool down the vehicle. The light on
the button comes on in recirculation.
4-22
2. Set the driver's and passenger's temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 23°C
(74°F) temperature setting and allow about
20 minutes for the system to regulate. Use the
driver's or passenger's temperature buttons to
adjust the temperature setting as necessary. If a
temperature setting of 15°C (60°F) is chosen, the
system remains at the maximum cooling setting.
If a temperature setting of 32°C (90°F) is chosen,
the system remains at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
Do not to cover the solar sensor located on the top of
the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based on sun load and also
turns on the headlamps. For more information on the
solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Pressing the fan switch will override this
delay and change the fan to a selected speed.
Manual Operation
D C (Fan Control):
Press these buttons to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
Pressing either fan button while in automatic control
places the fan under manual control. The fan setting
remains displayed and the AUTO light turns off. The air
delivery mode remains under automatic control.
H G (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press these buttons
to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
Repeatedly press either button until the desired mode
appears on the display. Pressing either mode button
while the system is off changes the air delivery mode
without turning the system on. Pressing either mode
button while in automatic control places the mode
under manual control.
The air delivery mode setting is displayed and the
AUTO light turns off. The fan remains under automatic
control.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
- (Defog):
This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets,
and side window vents. In this mode, the system
turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is close
to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected
while in the defog mode.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield and side window vents, with some
directed to the floor vents. In this mode, the system
automatically forces outside air into the vehicle and
runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is close to freezing. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in the defrost mode.
The passenger temperature control cannot be activated
while in defrost mode. If the PASS button is pressed,
the button indicator flashes three times and will not
work. If the passenger temperature buttons are
adjusted, the driver temperature indicator changes.
The passenger temperature will not be displayed.
) (Bi-Level):
Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets. Some air is directed towards the
windshield and side window outlets.
If vent, bi-level, or floor mode is selected again,
the climate control system displays the previous
temperature settings.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some
to the windshield, side window outlets, and second row
floor outlets. In this mode, the system automatically
selects outside air.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
4-23
# (Air Conditioning):
Press to turn the air
conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. An indicator
light comes on to show that the air conditioning is on.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that
the recirculation is on.
If this button is pressed when the air conditioning
compressor is unavailable, the indicator flashes three
times and then turns off. If the air conditioning is on
and the outside temperature drops below a temperature
which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective,
the air conditioning light turns off to show that the air
conditioning mode has been canceled.
This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the
air inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it takes
for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to
operate more efficiently.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so a small amount of water might drip under
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
4-24
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defog,
or defrost modes. If recirculation is selected with one
of those modes, the indicator light flashes three times
and then turns off. The air conditioning compressor
also comes on when this mode is activated. While in
recirculation mode the windows may fog when the
weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, select either
the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed.
The recirculation mode can also be turned off by turning
off the ignition.
REAR: For vehicles with the rear heat and air
conditioning controls. Press to turn the rear climate
control system on or off. See Rear Air Conditioning and
Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls on
page 4‑28.
Rear Window Defogger
Sensors
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the
rear window defogger on or off. It automatically
turns off several minutes after it has been activated.
The defogger can also be turned off by turning off the
engine. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows
are clear.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Heated Mirrors: For vehicles with heated outside
rearview mirrors, the mirrors heat to help clear fog
or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear
window defog button is pressed. See Outside Power
Mirrors on page 3‑55.
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille in the
middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar heat.
Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not
work properly.
4-25
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of the instrument panel to direct the airflow.
Operation Tips
The interior temperature sensors located in the
headliner above the driver side seat and if equipped, in
the headliner above the second row seats measure the
temperature of the air inside the vehicle.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located
behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air
temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside
the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could
cause a false reading in the displayed temperature.
The climate control system uses the information from
these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and
the air delivery mode. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be used as needed
to maintain cool outlet temperatures.
4-26
.
Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice,
snow, or any other obstruction (such as leaves).
The heater and defroster will work far better,
reducing the chance of fogging the inside of the
windows.
.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, press
the fan up button to the maximum fan level before
driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow
and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging
the inside of the window.
.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout the
vehicle.
.
Adding outside equipment to the front of the
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the
performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System
For vehicles with this system, the rear controls are three
knobs located in the headliner. The system can also be
controlled with the front controls.
Automatic Climate Control System on page 4‑20.
The rear system can also be turned off by turning the
rear fan knob to the 9 position.
Mimic Mode: This mode matches the rear climate
control to the front climate control airflow settings.
It comes on when REAR is pressed the first time.
Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating
airflow according to the settings of the rear controls.
It comes on when any rear control is adjusted.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
airflow temperature into the passenger area.
Fan Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow.
A. Fan Control
H (Vent): Air is directed through the headliner outlets.
B. Temperature Control
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed through the floor and
headliner outlets. The rear system floor outlets
are located directly behind the second row seats.
The flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets
depending upon where the knob is placed between the
settings.
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
REAR: Press the REAR button on the front climate
control system to turn the rear climate control system on
or off. An indicator comes on when the rear system is
on. See Climate Control System on page 4‑18 or Dual
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets. The rear
system floor outlets are located directly behind the
second row seats.
4-27
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System and Electronic Climate
Controls
REAR: Press the REAR button on the front climate
control system to turn the rear climate control system
on or off. An indicator comes on when the rear system
is on.
For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning
controls, they are integrated with the rear seat audio
controls located in the center console. The system can
be controlled from the front controls as well as the rear
controls.
The rear climate control system can also be turned
off by pressing and holding the C button. To turn the
system on from the rear seats, press any rear climate
control button, except the C button.
Mimic Mode: This mode matches the rear climate
control to the front climate control airflow settings.
It comes on when REAR is pressed the first time.
Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating
airflow according to the settings of the rear controls.
To turn the system on from the rear, press any rear
climate control button, except the C button.
Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls
A. Fan Control
B. Air Delivery Mode Control
C. Temperature Control
4-28
Automatic Operation, If Equipped.
AUTO: Press the air delivery mode button until this
setting is selected to control the inside temperature, air
delivery, and fan speed. AUTO appears in the display
when automatic operation is active.
+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature) : Press
the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the cabin
temperature. The rear control temperature display will
show the temperature setting increasing or decreasing.
The display only indicates climate control functions
when the system is in rear independent mode.
Manual Operation
D C (Fan Control):
Press these buttons on the rear
seat audio control panel to increase or decrease the
airflow. Pressing the fan up button when the system is
off will turn the system on. The air delivery mode will
remain under automatic control.
+/− (Temperature Control): Press these buttons
to adjust the temperature of the air flowing into the
passenger area. Press the + button for warmer air
and press the − button for cooler air.
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there might be or there
is a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
Gauges can indicate when there might be or there is
a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Often
gauges and warning lights work together to indicate
a problem with the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there
could be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press the mode
button to change the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. Repeatedly press the button until the desired
mode appears on the display. Multiple presses will cycle
through the delivery selections.
4-29
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States 4‐Speed version shown. 6‐Speed and Canada similar.
For vehicles with a Two-mode Hybrid, see the
Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.
4-30
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer shows the vehicle's speed in both
kilometers per hour (km/h) and miles per hour (mph).
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either kilometers (used in Canada) or miles
(used in the United States).
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has
been driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero.
Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel
cluster next to the trip odometer display, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the regular odometer.
Holding the reset button for approximately one second
while the trip odometer is displayed resets it.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several
seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt,
unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light
flashes for several
seconds, then comes on
solid for several more.
This chime and light sequence are repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the
driver safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light comes on.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
4-31
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
For vehicles equipped with the passenger safety belt
reminder light, several seconds after the engine is
started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind
the front passenger to buckle their safety belt. The
passenger safety belt light, located on the overhead
console, comes on and stays on for several seconds,
flashes for several more seconds and then comes on
solid for several more.
The system checks the airbag's electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 2‑83.
This chime and light
sequence is repeated if
the passenger remains
unbuckled and the vehicle
is in motion.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as
a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
4-32
The airbag readiness light
comes on solid for a few
seconds when the engine
is started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
{ WARNING:
In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, the label
on the vehicle's sun visors refers to “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS”.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑61 for more information.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If the vehicle has the airbag status indicator pictured
in the following illustration, then the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the right front passenger
position. The passenger airbag status indicator is on the
overhead console. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 2‑94 for important safety information.
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbols
for on and off, for several seconds as a system check.
If you are using remote start, if equipped, to start the
vehicle from a distance, you may not see the system
check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
4-33
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger frontal
airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑32
for more information, including important safety
information.
4-34
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but the
engine is not running,
as a check to show it is
working.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑61 for
more information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light
on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
Voltmeter Gauge
When the engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on, this gauge shows the
battery's state of charge
in DC volts.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create full power. If there
is a problem with the battery charging system, this light
will come on or the SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM DIC message will display. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4‑61 and Charging System
Light on page 4‑34 for more information.
When the engine is running, the gauge shows the
condition of the charging system. The charging system
regulates voltage based on the state of the battery for
improved fuel economy and battery life. The gauge may
transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher
reading, this is normal. Readings between the low
and high warning zones indicate the normal operating
range. The gauge may also read low during the fuel
economy mode, this is normal.
4-35
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light
comes on when the parking brake is set. If the vehicle
is driven with the parking brake engaged, a chime
sounds when the vehicle speed is greater than
8 km/h (5 mph).
The vehicle's hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can still
work and stop the vehicle. For good braking, both parts
need to be working well.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have the brake system
inspected right away.
This light can also come on due to low brake fluid.
See Brakes on page 6‑42 for more information.
United States
Canada
This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it is ready to warn if there is a problem.
{ WARNING:
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
4-36
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. The pedal might be harder to push or
might go closer to the floor. It can take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑41.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is
started.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the
vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 4‑36.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑61 for all
brake related DIC messages.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light then
goes off.
4-37
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
For vehicles with the
StabiliTrak® system, this
light comes on briefly
while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light then
goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on while driving, there
could be a problem with the StabiliTrak ® system and the
vehicle might need service. When this warning light is
on, the StabiliTrak® system is off and does not limit
wheel spin.
The light flashes if the system is active and is working
to assist the driver with directional control of the vehicle
in difficult driving conditions.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6 for more
information.
United States
Canada
This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard the vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gauge
reads 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load
or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the
gauge reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates that
the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
See Engine Overheating on page 6‑36.
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
4-38
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started. It provides
information about tire
pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring
System.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires is
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑47 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it
is safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑72
for more information.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6‑75 for more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show it is working. If it
does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
4-39
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original
tires with other than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's
emission controls and can cause this light to come
on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 6‑4.
4-40
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds, and
restart the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps and see your dealer for service as soon
as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
.
.
Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 6‑11. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling
after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one full
tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 6‑7.
If none of the above have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. The dealer has the
proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
4-41
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
programs to inspect the on-vehicle emission control
equipment For the inspection, the emission system
test equipment is connected to the vehicle’s Data Link
Connector (DLC).
The DLC is under the instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel. See your dealer if assistance is needed.
4-42
The vehicle may not pass inspection if:
.
the check engine light is on with the engine
running, or if the light does not come on when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN while the engine
is off.
.
the critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. This can
happen if the battery has recently been replaced or
if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system
evaluates critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take several days of
routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection, your
dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Gauge
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check the oil as soon as
possible.
{ WARNING:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gauge shows the engine oil pressure
in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine
is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
When the oil pressure reaches the low pressure zone,
the OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE message
appears in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑61 and Engine Oil
on page 6‑18 for more information.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
4-43
Oil Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light then
goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other
system problem.
Security Light
{ WARNING:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
4-44
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle's
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 3‑23.
Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps
are in use.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 4‑13 for more information.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4‑5
for more information.
Cruise Control Light
Tow/Haul Mode Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 4‑7 for more information.
For vehicles with the tow/
haul mode feature, this
light comes on when the
Tow/Haul mode has been
activated.
For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode on
page 3‑39.
4-45
Fuel Gauge
When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message appears in the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑61
for more information.
Here are some situations owners may experience with
the fuel gauge. None of these indicate a problem with
the fuel gauge.
United States
At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gauge reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank's
capacity to fill the tank.
.
The gauge goes back to empty when the ignition is
turned off.
Canada
The fuel gauge, when the ignition is on, shows how
much fuel the vehicle has left in the tank.
An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
The gauge first indicates empty before the vehicle is out
of fuel, and the vehicle's fuel tank should be filled soon.
4-46
.
For vehicles with a Two-mode Hybrid, see the
Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light, under the fuel
gauge, comes on briefly
while the engine is being
started.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also
displays warning messages if a system problem is
detected.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster.
This light and a chime comes on when the fuel tank is
low on fuel. The Driver Information Center also displays
a “FUEL LEVEL LOW” message. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4‑61 for more information.
When fuel is added this light and message should go
off. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was last
displayed before the engine was turned off.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DIC Operation and
Displays (With DIC Buttons)” later in this section and
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑72 for the displays available.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see “DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)” later in
this section for the displays available.
4-47
DIC Operation and Displays
(With DIC Buttons)
DIC Buttons
The buttons are the trip/
fuel, vehicle information,
customization, and set/
reset buttons. The button
functions are detailed in
the following pages.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information below
explains the operation of this system.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, next to the steering wheel.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑72 for more information.
If the vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also use the trip
odometer reset stem to view some of the DIC displays.
See “Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items” later in
this section.
4-48
3 (Trip/Fuel):
Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, average economy,
fuel used, timer, instantaneous economy and Active
Fuel Management™ indicator, and transmission
temperature. The compass and outside air temperature
will also be shown in the display. The temperature will
be shown in °F or °C depending on the units selected.
T (Vehicle Information):
Press this button to display
the oil life, units, side blind zone system on/off, tire
pressure readings for vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), trailer brake gain and output
information for vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system, engine hours, Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter programming, compass zone
setting, and compass recalibration.
U (Customization): Press this button to customize
the feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4‑72 for
more information.
V (Set/Reset):
Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on
the DIC.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has been
driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Pressing
the trip odometer reset stem will also display the
odometer.
To switch between English and metric measurements,
see “Units” later in this section.
Trip Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This
display shows the current distance traveled in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the
trip odometer. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will
also display the trip odometer.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the
set/reset button while the trip odometer is displayed.
You can also reset the trip odometer while it is
displayed by pressing and holding the trip odometer
reset stem.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the
number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold
the set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven
5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles
(8.4 km), etc.
4-49
Fuel Range
Fuel Used
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle
can be driven without refueling. The display will show
LOW if the fuel level is low.
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays.
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu
item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold
the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle's fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
This estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if the
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may change
even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank.
This is because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving
produces better fuel economy than city driving.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Timer
Average Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY
displays. This display shows the approximate average
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km). This number is calculated based on the
number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time
this menu item was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY,
press and hold the set/reset button.
4-50
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays.
This display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the
amount of time that has passed since the timer
was last reset, not including time the ignition is off.
Time will continue to be counted as long as the ignition
is on, even if another display is being shown on the
DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display will
return to zero.
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while
TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset
button while TIMER is displayed.
Transmission Temperature
Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays.
This display shows the temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
degrees Celsius (°C).
Instantaneous Economy and Active Fuel
Management™ Indicator
If your vehicle has this display, press the trip/fuel button
until INST ECON V8 displays. This display shows the
current fuel economy at a particular moment and will
change frequently as driving conditions change. This
display shows the instantaneous fuel economy in miles
per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
Unlike average economy, this screen cannot be reset.
An Active Fuel Management indicator will display on the
right side of the DIC, while INST ECON displays on the
left side. Active Fuel Management allows the engine to
operate on either four or eight cylinders, depending on
your driving demands. When Active Fuel Management
is active, V4 will display on the DIC. When Active Fuel
Management is inactive, V8 will display. See Active
Fuel Management™ on page 3‑33 for more
information.
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
Oil Life
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an
estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If you see
99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means
99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil life
system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑61. You should
change the oil as soon as you can. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑18. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3
for more information.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
4-51
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has
just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until
the next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system,
see Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑20.
Side Blind Zone Alert
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this display allows the system to be turned on
or off. Once in this display, press the set/reset button
to select between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the
system will be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system
will be turned off. When the SBZA system is turned off,
the DIC will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM OFF message as a reminder that the system
has been turned off. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4‑61 and Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 3‑60 for more information.
Units
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in
this display, press the set/reset button to select
between ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the
vehicle information will then be displayed in the
unit of measurement selected.
4-52
Tire Pressure
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in
the DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
Press the vehicle information button until the DIC
displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC
displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to add
pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑72 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑61 for more
information.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer for service.
Trailer Gain and Output
Relearn Remote Key
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears
in the DIC. Press the vehicle information button until
TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display.
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. This procedure
will erase all previously learned transmitters. Therefore,
they must be relearned as additional transmitters.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This
setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a
trailer connected or disconnected. To adjust this setting,
see “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49 for more information.
To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime
a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is
displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes may appear in the
OUTPUT display. See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control
System” under Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49 for more
information.
Engine Hours
Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE
HOURS displays. This display shows the total number
of hours the engine has run.
1. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the
second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
4-53
Compass Zone Setting
Trip Odometer
This display allows for setting the compass zone.
See DIC Compass on page 4‑58
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays.
This display shows the current distance traveled in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset
for the trip odometer.
Compass Recalibration
This display allows for calibrating the compass.
See DIC Compass on page 4‑58
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items
Use the trip odometer reset stem to view the odometer
and trip odometer. The Language selection and Engine
Hours display can also be accessed with the trip
odometer reset stem.
Odometer
Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER
displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle
has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
4-54
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and
holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer is displayed.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the
number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds.
The trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last
turned on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven
5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving,
the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
Language
This display allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear. To select a language:
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
ODOMETER displays.
2. While in the ODOMETER display, press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until
the currently set language displays.
3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer
reset stem to scroll through all of the available
languages.
The available selections are ENGLISH (default),
FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), and
NO CHANGE.
4. Once the desired language is displayed, release
the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice.
Engine Hours
To display the ENGINE HOURS, place the ignition in
LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while
viewing the ODOMETER. This display shows the total
number of hours the engine has run.
DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons)
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
information below explains the operation of this system.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the
instrument panel cluster. Pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC
messages.
The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information,
and warning messages if a system problem is detected.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you
can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the
following displays: language selection, trip odometer,
transmission temperature, trailer brake gain and output
information for vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system, compass zone setting, compass
recalibration, oil life, Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) programming for vehicles with the TPMS, and
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming.
4-55
Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items
Language
This display allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear. To select a language:
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
ODOMETER displays.
2. While in the ODOMETER display, press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until
the currently set language displays.
3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer
reset stem to scroll through all of the available
languages.
The available languages are ENGLISH (default),
FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), and
NO CHANGE.
4. Once the desired language is displayed, release
the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice.
Trip Odometer
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays.
This display shows the current distance traveled in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset
for the trip odometer.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing
and holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer is displayed.
4-56
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the
number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds.
The trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last
turned on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven
5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles
(8.4 km), etc.
Transmission Temperature
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRANS TEMP
displays. This display shows the temperature of the
automatic transmission fluid in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
Trailer Gain and Output
Oil Life
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system, the trailer brake display
appears in the DIC. Press the trip odometer reset
stem until TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display.
To access this display, the vehicle must be in
P (Park). Press the trip odometer reset stem until
OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This display shows an
estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If you see
99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means
99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil life
system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This
setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a
trailer connected or disconnected. To adjust this setting,
see “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49 for more information.
OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime
a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is
displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes may appear in the
OUTPUT display. See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control
System” under Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49 for more
information.
Compass Zone Setting
This display allows for setting the compass zone.
See DIC Compass on page 4‑58 for more information.
Compass Recalibration
This display allows for calibrating the compass.
See DIC Compass on page 4‑58 for more information.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑61. You should
change the oil as soon as you can. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑18. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3
for more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system,
see Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑20.
4-57
Relearn Tire Positions
Your vehicle may have this display. To access this
display, the vehicle must be in P (Park). If your vehicle
has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor, the
system must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn the
tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 6‑73. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑78 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑61 for more information.
Relearn Remote Key
To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park).
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. This procedure
will erase all previously learned transmitters. Therefore,
they must be relearned as additional transmitters.
To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until RELEARN
REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for
three seconds.
The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
will display.
4-58
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the
second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
DIC Compass
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
Your dealer will set the correct zone for your location.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state
or province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth's
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the
compass is not set to the zone where you live, the
compass may give false readings. The compass must
be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is
traveling.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).
Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
displays. Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC
buttons, press the trip odometer reset stem until
CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays.
2. Find the vehicle's current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4-59
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons,
press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for
two seconds to select the next available variance
zone. Repeat this step until the appropriate
variance zone is displayed.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle
in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers,
or other industrial structures, if possible.
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for
example, N for North, or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount,
a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad holder,
or any other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move
the magnetic item, then turn on the vehicle and calibrate
the compass.
4-60
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in which
the vehicle is located. See “Compass Variance
(Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during the
calibration procedure.
2. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS
V TO CALIBRATE COMPASS displays. Or, if the
vehicle does not have DIC buttons, press the trip
odometer reset stem until CALIBRATE COMPASS
displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration. Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC
buttons, press and hold the trip odometer reset
stem for two seconds to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE
for a few seconds when the calibration is complete.
The DIC display will then return to the
previous menu.
DIC Warnings and Messages
BATTERY LOW START VEHICLE
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
When the vehicle’s battery is severely discharged, this
message will display and four chimes will sound. Start
the vehicle immediately. If the vehicle is not started and
the battery continues to discharge, the climate controls,
heated seats, and audio systems will shut off and the
vehicle may require a jump start. These systems will
function again after the vehicle is started.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument
panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument
panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the
messages and to clear them from the display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be cleared.
You should take any messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
messages will only make the messages disappear,
not correct the problem.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the engine oil needs to
be changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure
to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑20 for
information on how to reset the message. See Engine
Oil on page 6‑18 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 7‑3 for more information.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the
Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.
4-61
CHECK TRAILER WIRING
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, this message may display and a chime
may sound when one of the following conditions exists:
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see
if the message still appears on the DIC.
.
A trailer with electric brakes becomes
disconnected from the vehicle.
‐ If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
stopped, this message clears itself after a
short time.
‐ If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
moving, this message stays on until the ignition
is turned off.
.
There is a short in the wiring to the electric trailer
brakes.
When this message displays, power is no longer
available to the trailer brakes.
As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your
vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition
off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn
the ignition back on. This message clears if the trailer
is reconnected. This message also clears if you
acknowledge it. If this message still displays, either your
vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your dealer.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49 for more information.
4-62
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning)
TURNED OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on
page 4‑38. To avoid added strain on a hot engine,
the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the
air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message displays when the engine oil becomes
hotter than the normal operating temperature. Stop and
allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Gauge on page 4‑38.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑36 for
more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine
further enters the engine coolant protection mode.
See Engine Overheating on page 6‑36 for further
information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 4‑38.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 6‑39 for information on driving to a safe place in
an emergency.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
This message also displays when the vehicle's engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven
at a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your
dealer for service as soon as possible.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑36 for
more information.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for
operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating
temperature.
HOOD OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel
level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel
Gauge on page 4‑46 and Fuel on page 6‑6 for
more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood
is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
the hood for obstructions, and close the hood again.
Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
4-63
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when ice conditions are
possible.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil
pressure is low, severe engine damage may occur.
If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause
of the low oil pressure is corrected. See Engine Oil
on page 6‑18 for more information.
This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur.
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not
operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has
been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible and
have your vehicle serviced by your dealer. See Engine
Oil on page 6‑18.
4-64
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE OWNERS
MANUAL
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this message displays if there is
something interfering with the park assist system.
See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on
page 3‑58 for more information.
PARK ASSIST OFF
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, after the vehicle has been started, this
message displays to remind the driver that the URPA
system has been turned off. Press the set/reset button
or the trip odometer reset stem to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display. To turn the
URPA system back on, see Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) on page 3‑58.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the front
passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC.
REAR ACCESS OPEN
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate
and liftglass. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the
door again. Check to see if the message still appears
on the DIC.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your
vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 3‑5 and DIC Operation and Displays (With
DIC Buttons) on page 4‑48 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4‑55 for
more information.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 3‑5.
SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
This message displays if a problem occurs with the
four-wheel-drive system. If this message appears,
stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Make
sure the key is in the LOCK/OFF position for at least
one minute and then restart the vehicle and check for
the message on the DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when you begin driving,
the four-wheel-drive system needs service. See your
dealer.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your dealer inspect the system for
problems. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑32
and Airbag System on page 2‑83 for more information.
4-65
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a
problem with the battery charging system. Under certain
conditions, the charging system light may also turn on
in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System
Light on page 4‑34. Driving with this problem could
drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Have the electrical system checked as soon as
possible. See your dealer.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays along with the brake system
warning light if there is a problem with the brake
system. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 4‑36. If this message appears, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display. If the
message is still displayed or appears again when you
begin driving, the brake system needs service as soon
as possible. See your dealer.
4-66
SERVICE BRAKES SOON
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brake system. If this message appears, stop as soon
as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display. If the
message is still displayed or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
See your dealer.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this message displays if there is a
problem with the URPA system. Do not use this system
to help you park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) on page 3‑58 for more information. See your
dealer for service.
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system and this message displays, both SBZA displays
will remain on indicating there is a problem with the
SBZA system. If these displays remain on after
continued driving, the system needs service. See your
dealer. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 3‑60
for more information.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
®
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak and this message
displays, it means there may be a problem with the
StabiliTrak system. If you see this message, try to
reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least
15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should
see your dealer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive,
however, you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak, so
reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the Autoride® suspension system,
this message displays when the Autoride suspension
system is not operating properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem
with the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or
may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle
to your dealer before turning off the engine. See
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation on
page 3‑25 for more information.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is
not working properly. The tire pressure light also flashes
and then remains on during the same ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Light on page 4‑39. Several
conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑75 for more
information. If the warning comes on and stays on,
there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your
dealer.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message
displays when there is a problem with the Traction
Control System (TCS). When this message displays,
the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See your dealer for service.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6 for more
information.
4-67
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, this message displays and a chime
sounds when there is a problem with the ITBC system.
When this message displays, power is no longer
available to the trailer brakes.
As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle
over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off.
Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the
ignition back on. If this message still displays, either
your vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your
dealer.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49 for more information.
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM OFF
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this message displays when the SBZA system
has been turned off. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
on page 3‑60 and DIC Operation and Displays (With
DIC Buttons) on page 4‑48 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4‑55 for
more information.
4-68
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this message displays when the SBZA system
is disabled because the sensor is blocked and cannot
detect vehicles in your blind zone. The sensor may be
blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush. This message
may also display during heavy rain or due to road spray.
It may also come on when driving in isolated areas
with no guardrails, trees, or road signs and light traffic.
Your vehicle does not need service. For cleaning
instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on page 6‑112.
See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 3‑60 for
more information.
STABILITRAK OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when you turn off StabiliTrak, or when the stability
control has been automatically disabled. To limit
wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability
enhancement system, you should normally leave
StabiliTrak on. However, you should turn StabiliTrak
off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow
and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it,
or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions and
require more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5‑29. To turn the
StabiliTrak system on or off, see StabiliTrak® System
on page 5‑6.
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
.
One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
.
The message also displays if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑36.
.
The message could display if the stability system
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
checks due to driving conditions.
.
The message displays if an engine or vehicle
related problem has been detected and the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer.
.
The message also displays if the vehicle is shifted
into 4LO (Two Speed Transfer Case Only).
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message may display along with the check engine
light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle's fuel
cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 4‑39. Reinstall the fuel cap fully.
See Filling the Tank on page 6‑11. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving
trips with the cap properly installed should turn this light
and message off.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the TPMS is
re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle. The tire
positions must be re-learned after rotating the tires or
after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑78, Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 6‑73, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑72 for more information.
4-69
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in
one or more of the vehicle's tires needs to be checked.
This message also displays LEFT FRT (left front),
RIGHT FRT (right front), LEFT RR (left rear), or RIGHT
RR (right rear) to indicate the location of the low tire.
The low tire pressure warning light will also come on.
See Tire Pressure Light on page 4‑39. You can receive
more than one tire pressure message at a time. To read
the other messages that may have been sent at the
same time, press the set/reset button or the trip
odometer reset stem. If a tire pressure message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have
the tire pressures checked and set to those shown
on the Tire Loading Information label. See Tires on
page 6‑63, Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31, and
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑72. The DIC also
shows the tire pressure values. See “DIC Operation and
Displays (With DIC Buttons)” earlier in this section.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned off.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 5‑6 for more information.
4-70
TRAILER CONNECTED
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, this message displays briefly when a
trailer with electric brakes is first connected to the
vehicle.
This message clears itself after several seconds.
This message also clears if you acknowledge it. After
this message clears, the TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT
display appears in the DIC.
See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT” under DIC Operation
and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 4‑48 or DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑55 and “Integrated Trailer Brake Control
System” under Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49 for
more information.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
TURN SIGNAL ON
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with overheated
transmission fluid or while the transmission
temperature warning is displayed.
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
This message displays along with a sound if the
transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with
the transmission fluid temperature high can cause
damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This message clears and
the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches a
safe level.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as
soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 6‑16 for the location of the windshield washer
fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 6‑41 for more information.
4-71
DIC Vehicle Customization
(With DIC Buttons)
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities
that allow you to program certain features to one
preferred setting. Customization features can only be
programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot
be programmed to a preferred setting for two different
drivers.
All of the customization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
4-72
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to scroll through
the available customizable options.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle's
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 3‑11 for more
information.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
You can also change the language by pressing the
trip odometer reset stem. See “Language” under DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) earlier in
this section for more information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park).
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-73
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn
off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also allows
you to select which doors and when the doors will
automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Door Locks on page 3‑11 for more information.
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑5 for more
information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver's door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver's door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park) .
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when the
key is taken out of the ignition.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-74
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock
button is pressed again within five seconds of the
previous command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the
RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑5
for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle's doors and liftgate will be
delayed. When locking the doors and liftgate with the
power door lock switch and a door or the liftgate is
open, this feature will delay locking the doors and
liftgate until five seconds after the last door is closed.
You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed
locking feature is in use. The key must be out of the
ignition for this feature to work. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the power door
lock switch twice. See Delayed Locking on page 3‑11
for more information.
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle's
doors.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door or the liftgate is closed.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-75
EXIT LIGHTING
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods
after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-76
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle
is no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 3‑5 for more information.
NO CHANGE : No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
CHIME VOLUME
PARK TILT MIRRORS
This feature allows you to select the volume level of the
chime.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically
tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 3‑57 for more
information.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver's outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger's outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse).
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's and passenger's outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into R (Reverse).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-77
EASY EXIT RECALL
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2‑10
for more information.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No automatic seat exit recall
will occur. The recall will only occur after pressing the
easy exit seat button.
BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): If the features are
enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the
driver's seat will move back when the key is removed
from the ignition or after pressing the easy exit seat
button.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition.
If the automatic movement has already occurred, and
you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again,
the seat will stay in the original exit position, unless a
memory recall took place prior to removing the key
again.
4-78
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
EASY EXIT SETUP
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit seat
feature. It also allows you to turn off the automatic easy
exit feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on
page 2‑10 and “EASY EXIT RECALL” earlier for more
information.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SETUP
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF: No automatic seat exit will recall.
SEAT ONLY (Default): The driver's seat will recall.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the remote memory seat recall
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on
page 2‑10 for more information.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn
the remote start off or on. The remote start feature
allows you to start the engine from outside of the
vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑8
for more information.
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will
occur.
ON: The driver's seat and, on some vehicles, the
outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored
driving position when the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. On some
vehicles with the adjustable throttle and brake pedal
feature, the pedals will also automatically move.
See “Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation and
Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 4‑48 or DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑55 for more information on matching
transmitters to driver ID numbers.
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-79
FACTORY SETTINGS
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to exit the feature
settings menu.
Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT
FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to exit the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
4-80
.
The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
.
The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
.
The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
.
A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
{ WARNING:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
.
Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
.
Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
Setting the Clock
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN, then press the O button to turn the
radio on.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 5‑2.
2. Press the H button to display HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year).
Notice: Contact your dealer before adding any
equipment.
3. Press the softkey located under any one of the
tabs to change that setting.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle's engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
4. To increase the time or date, do one of the
following:
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 3‑29 for more information.
.
Press the softkey below the selected tab.
.
Press the
.
.
¨ SEEK button.
Press the \ FWD button.
Turn the f knob clockwise.
4-81
5. To decrease the time or date, do one of the
following:
.
.
.
Radio(s)
© SEEK button.
Press the s REV button.
Turn the f knob counterclockwise.
Press the
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Press the H button and then the softkey located
below the forward arrow tab. 12H, 24H, the date
MM/DD (month and day), and DD/MM/ (day and
month) displays.
2. Press the softkey located below the desired option.
3. Press the H button again to apply the desired
option, or let the screen time out.
4-82
Radio with CD/MP3 shown, Radio with CD/MP3/USB
similar
If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, it has a CD/MP3/DVD and USB radio. See
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4‑125
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate.
The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed
DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.).
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Radio with CD/MP3/DVD and USB
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
Radios with CD and DVD
Radios with CD/MP3/DVD and USB have a Bose®
Surround Sound System. Some of its features are
explained later in this section under, “Adjusting the
Speakers (Balance/Fade)”.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS information. This system
relies upon receiving specific information from these
stations and only works when the information is
available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS
station, the station name or call letters displays.
In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
4-83
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™,
if equipped.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨ : Press either SEEK arrow to go to the
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) automatically
adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down.
The volume level should be consistent while driving.
previous or to the next station and stay there.
To activate SCV:
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) tab on the radio displays.
4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
increases the audio volume to compensate for
faster vehicle speeds.
4-84
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a
few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio Service, MP3,
and RDS Features): For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA
or RDS features, press 4 to display additional text
information related to the current FM-RDS or XM
station; or CD, MP3 or WMA song. If information is
available during XM, CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the
song title information displays on the top line of the
display and artist information displays on the bottom
line. When information is not available, “No Info”
displays.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is stopped. Tune to favorite
stations using the softkeys, favorites button, and
steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature.
See Defensive Driving on page 5‑2.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six softkeys below
the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio
favorites page button (FAV button). Press the FAV
button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page. Each
page of favorites can contain any combination of AM,
FM, or XM, if equipped, stations.
The balance/fade and tone settings that were previously
adjusted, are stored with the favorite stations.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
the station is to be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a
beep sounds. When that softkey is pressed and
released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each softkey radio station to
be stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the number of favorites pages by pressing
the softkey below the displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing
the radio station frequency tabs and to begin the
process of programming favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
4-85
Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until
the tone control tabs display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired tab, or press the softkey below the
tab. Turn the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
adjust the highlighted setting. Adjust the highlighted
setting by pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD
(forward), or s REV (reverse) button until the desired
levels are obtained. If a station's frequency is weak or if
there is static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the
middle position, press the softkey under the BASS,
MID, or TREB tab for more than two seconds. A beep
sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose bass
and treble equalization settings designed for different
types of music. The choices are pop, rock, country, talk,
jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or changing
bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and
treble settings.
4-86
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ settings
are either MANUAL or TALK.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade,
press the f knob until the speaker control tabs display.
Continue pressing to highlight the desired tab, or press
the softkey under the tab. Turn the f knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting.
Adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either SEEK
arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button until the desired
levels are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the softkey under the BAL or FADE tab for more
than two seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjusts
to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to
the middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds.
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radio
disables FADE and the rear speakers mute.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM
stations when the radio is in the XM mode. To find XM
channels within a category:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category tabs. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
.
Radios with CD/MP3/DVD and USB can also
navigate the category list by pressing the
s REV button or the \ FWD button.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
3. Turn the f knob, press the softkeys below the
right or left arrows displayed, or press either
SEEK arrow to go to the previous or to the next
XM station within the selected category.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.
3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be
removed.
4. Press the softkey under the Remove tab until the
category name along with the word Removed
displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton
under the Restore All label.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display favorites again.
4-87
Radio Messages
Care of the CD and DVD Player
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle and it must be
returned to your dealer for service.
Do not add any label to a CD. It could get caught in the
CD or DVD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal
computer and a description label is needed, try labeling
the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 4‑113 later in this
section for further detail.
4-88
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD
optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player
mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD
player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
Care of CDs and DVDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD
or DVD player scans the bottom surface of the disc.
If the surface of a CD or DVD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD or DVD does
not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the bottom
side of a CD or DVD while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD or DVD is soiled, clean it with
a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with water.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
Using the CD Player
Inserting a Disc (Single CD Player)
Inserting a Disc (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing in
5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and in 30 seconds for a DVD,
depending on media type and format ranges.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, while a CD is in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source. The CD is
controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or
by the RSA unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on
page 4‑134 for more information. The DVD/CD decks,
(upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD
deck) of the radio are compatible with most audio CDs,
CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.
When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD
symbol displays on the left side of the radio display.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm (3 in) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
4-89
Ejecting a Disc
Playing a CD
Z EJECT or CD (Eject):
f (Tune):
Press and release to eject
the disc that is currently playing. A CD ejecting from
a radio with CD/MP3/DVD and USB, ejects from the
bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The
disc can be removed. If the disc is not removed, after
several seconds, the disc automatically pulls back into
the player.
Z DVD (Eject):
Press and release to eject the disc
that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays.
If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold for more than five seconds to force the
disc to eject.
4-90
Turn to select tracks on the CD that is
currently playing.
© SEEK ¨ :
Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds on the CD
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the next
track.
For Radios with CD/MP3/DVD and USB, press the
left arrow to go to the start of the current track, if more
than five seconds on the CD have played. If less than
five seconds on the CD have played, the previous track
plays. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward through
the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Fast Reverse):
Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks
can be listened to in random, rather than sequential
order.
To use random, press the softkey below the RDM tab.
Press the same softkey again to turn off random.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the disc and/or track number displays when
a CD is in the player. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Input Device Found”
displays.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the
radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing
the track or chapter number displays when a disc is in
either slot. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources
and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front
auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot,
CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4‑125 for more
information.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use the
remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only) through
the remote control.
4-91
Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at a time. An audio source is defined as
DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack,
or Rear Auxiliary Jack.
Radios with a Single CD player have the capability
of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more
information on how to play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW
disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
Press the O button to turn the radio on. The radio can
be heard through all of the vehicle speakers.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM, FM,
or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the DVD/
CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD slot, front,
or rear auxiliary input (if available).
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the front
seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this
source through the vehicle speakers. See “Using the
Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/
Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System on page 4‑125 for more information.
In some vehicles, depending on audio options, the rear
speakers can be muted when the RSA power is turned
on. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 4‑134 for more
information.
4-92
Radios with a CD and DVD player have the capability of
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more
information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single CD player or
radios with a Six-Disc player displays CHECK DISC
and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs.
Radios with a CD and DVD player could display other
messages when an error occurs:
Optical Error: The disc was inserted upside down.
Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with an invalid or
unknown format.
Player Error: There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT
problems.
.
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
.
The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
.
There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
.
The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Using the DVD Player
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the
remote control, or by the RSA system, or by the buttons
on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4‑125
and Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 4‑134 for more
information.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the
appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of
most DVDs.
The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most
audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 and
WMA formats.
If an error message displays on the video screen or the
radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under, Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4‑125 and
“DVD Radio Error Messages” in this section for more
information.
4-93
Inserting a Disc
Playing a DVD
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not
accept some paper labeled media. The player starts
loading the disc into the system and shows “Loading
Disc” on the radio display. At the same time, the radio
displays a softkey menu of option(s). Some discs
automatically play the movie while others default to the
softkey menu display, which requires the radio's Play,
Enter, or Navigation softkeys to be pressed. The rear
seat passenger can also start the disc with the remote
control.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the
radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing
track or chapter number displays when a disc is in
either slot. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources
and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front
auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot,
CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4‑125 for more
information.
Loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the Z button on the radio to eject the disc.
If a disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed,
the radio reloads the disc after a short period of time.
The disc is stored in the radio. The radio does not
resume play of the disc automatically. If the RSA
system is sourced to the DVD, the movie when
reloaded into the DVD player begins to play again.
In case loading and reading of a DVD or CD cannot
be completed (unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails
to eject, press and hold the DVD Z button more than
five seconds to force the disc to eject.
4-94
O (Power):
Press to turn the radio on or off. Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the volume. Press and hold for more than two seconds
to turn off the radio and Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, and to start the parental control feature.
Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from
operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or remote
control.
A lock symbol displays next to the clock display.
The parental control feature remains on until this knob
is pressed and held for more than two seconds again,
or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the
vehicle.
f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD.
© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press the left
arrow to return to the start of the current track or
chapter. Press the left arrow again to go to the previous
track or chapter. This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press the right arrow
to go to the next track or chapter. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD or DVD.
If a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player
automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
because of an unknown format, etc., and the disc fails
to eject, press and hold this button for more than
five seconds to force the disc to eject.
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu
shows several tab options for DVD playing. Press
the pushbuttons located under any desired tab option
during DVD playback. See the tab options listed after,
for more information.
s REV (Fast Reverse):
The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V
menus and controls through the remote control.
See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System on page 4‑125 for more information.
The Video Screen automatically turns on when the
DVD-V is inserted into the DVD slot.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
tab displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward
arrow is showing on display, the system is in pause
mode. If the pause icon is showing on display, the
system is in playback mode. If the DVD screen is off,
press the play button to turn the screen on.
Press to quickly reverse the
CD or DVD at five times the normal speed. The radio
displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse. To stop
fast reversing, press again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
Press to fast forward the CD
or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and fast
forwards five times the normal speed. To stop fast
forwarding, press again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
4-95
Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there could be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the
movie automatically, press the softkey under the
play/pause tab on the radio. If the DVD still does not
play, refer to the on-screen instructions, if available.
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding a DVD.
The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A menus
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 4‑125 for more information. The Video Screen
does not automatically power on when the DVD-A is
inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually turned
on by the rear seat occupant through the remote control
power button.
r (Enter):
Press to select the choices that are
highlighted in any menu.
y (Menu):
Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD
menu is different on every DVD. Use the softkey under
the navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through the
DVD menu. After making a selection press this button.
This button only operates when using a DVD.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
q (Return): Press to exit the current active menu and
return to the previous menu. This tab operates only
when a DVD is playing and a menu is active.
Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows
several tab options for DVD playing. Press the softkeys
under any desired tab option during DVD playback.
See the tab options listed after, for more information.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward
arrow is showing on the display, the system is in pause
mode. If the pause icon is showing on the display, the
system is in playback mode.
q Group r : Press to cycle through musical
groupings on the DVD-A disc.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle through audio
stream formats located on the DVD-A disc. The video
screen shows the audio stream changing.
4-96
Stopping and Resuming Playback
DVD Radio Error Messages
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system,
press the c button on the remote control, or press the
softkey under the stop or the play/pause tab displayed
on the radio. If the radio head is sourced to something
other than DVD-V, press the DVD/CD AUX button to
make DVD-V the active source.
Player Error: This message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems.
To resume DVD playback, press the r / j button
on the remote control, or press the softkey under the
play/pause tab displayed on the radio. The DVD should
resume play from where it last stopped if the disc has
not been ejected and the stop button has not been
pressed twice on the remote control. If the disc has
been ejected or the stop button has been pressed twice
on the remote control, the disc resumes playing at the
beginning of the disc.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if the
disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc
is present when the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is
pressed on the radio.
4-97
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio
output; do not plug the headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such
as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player,
or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected to the
auxiliary input jack for use as another audio source.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 5‑2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over the
vehicle speakers.
For optimal sound quality, increase the portable audio
device's volume to the loudest level.
It is always best to power the portable audio device
through its own battery while playing.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume
of the portable player. Additional volume adjustments
might have to be made from the portable device if the
volume is not loud or soft enough.
4-98
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device also
continues to play.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
a portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the
radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing
track or chapter number displays when a disc is in
either slot. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources
and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front
auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot,
CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4‑125 for more
information.
Using the USB Port
Radios with a USB port can control a USB storage
device or an iPod® using the radio buttons and knobs.
See Using an MP3 (Radios with CD) on page 4‑99
or Using an MP3 (Radios with CD and DVD) on
page 4‑106 for information about how to connect and
control a USB storage device or an iPod.
USB Support
The USB connector is located on the instrument panel
or in the center console, and uses the USB 2.0
standard.
USB Supported Devices
Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from
Apple® for proper operation. iPod firmware can
be updated using the latest iTunes® application.
See www.apple.com/itunes.
For help with identifying your iPod, go to
www.apple.com/support.
Using an MP3 (Radios with CD)
Format
Radios that have the capability of playing MP3s can
play .mp3 or .wma files that were recorded onto a CD-R
or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with the
following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
or a variable bit rate.
.
USB Flash Drives
.
Portable USB Hard Drives
.
Fifth generation or later iPod
.
iPod nanos
.
iPod touch
Radios that have a USB port can play .mp3 and .wma
files that are stored on a USB storage device as well as
AAC files that are stored on an iPod®.
.
iPod classic
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
Not all iPods and USB Drives are compatible with the
USB port.
The radio can play discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio and MP3 files. If both formats
are on the disc, the radio reads all MP3 files first, then
the uncompressed CD audio files.
4-99
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File and Folder
Structure
The radio supports:
.
Up to 50 folders.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
Up to 50 playlists.
.
Up to 255 files.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
.
Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension.
USB Supported File and Folder Structure
The radio supports:
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored
in the root directory when the disc or storage device
does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root
directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.
Empty Folder
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the
player advances to the next folder that contains files.
Order of Play
Compressed audio files are accessed in the following
order:
.
Playlists (Px).
.
Up to 700 folders.
.
Files stored in the root directory.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
Files stored in folders in the root directory.
.
Up to 65,535 files.
.
Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.
.
Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.
.
AAC files stored on an iPod.
.
FAT16
.
FAT32
4-100
Tracks are played in the following order:
.
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
.
Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. The display does not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of
the filename is not displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were
created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however,
there is no playlist editing capability using the radio.
These playlists are treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are
stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio
with a USB port.
Playlists can be changed by using the S c (previous)
and c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or the
© SEEK ¨ arrows. MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that have
been recorded without using file folders can be played.
If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum
of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders and files, the
player allows access and navigates up to the maximum,
but all items over the maximum are not accessible.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently
playing.
© SEEK:
Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨ SEEK:
Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume
and the elapsed time of the file displays. Release
s REV to resume playing.
4-101
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume
and the elapsed time of the file displays. Release
\ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey
located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the
next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the
desired artist displays.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the softkey below
S c to go to the first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below c T
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album:
to go to the first track in the next folder.
RDM (Random): MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW can
be listened to in random, rather than sequential order.
To use random, press the softkey under the RDM tab.
Press the same softkey again to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator):
Press the softkey below h
to have the files played in order by artist or album.
The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and
album ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes
to scan the disc depending on the number of files
on the disc. The radio may begin playing while it is
scanning in the background.
When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files
in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on
the second line of the display. Once all songs by that
artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.
4-102
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab
from the sort screen.
3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to
the main music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the second line between
the arrows and songs from the current album begin to
play. Once all songs from that album have played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on
the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below
the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
Connecting a USB Storage Device
or iPod®
Using the Radio to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB
storage device.
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod
using the radio buttons and knobs and display song
information on the radio’s display.
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device to
the USB port located on the instrument panel or in the
center console.
To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable
that came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector
and connect the other end to the USB port located in
the center console. If the vehicle is on and the USB
connection works, “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo
may appear on the iPod and iPod appears on the
radio's display. The iPod music appears on the radio’s
display and begins playing.
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle
if the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle's battery.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported,
it can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input
Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨ SEEK:
Press to go to the next track. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
4 (Information):
Press to display additional information
about the selected track.
4-103
Using Softkeys to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The five softkeys below the radio display are used to
control the functions listed below.
To use the softkeys:
1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio
display to display the functions listed below,
or press the softkey below the function if it is
currently displayed.
2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function
on it to use that function.
j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the
track. The tab appears raised when pause is being
used. Press the softkey below j again to resume
playback.
Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back
to the main display screen on an iPod, or the root
directory on a USB storage device.
4-104
c (Folder View):
Press the softkey below c to view
the contents of the current folder on the USB drive.
To browse and select files:
1. Press the softkey below
c.
f to scroll through the list of folders.
Press f to select the desired folder. If there is
2. Turn
3.
more then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
the desired folder is reached.
4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selected
folder.
5. Press
f to select the desired file to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
h (Music Navigator):
Press the softkey below h
to view and select a file on an iPod, using the iPod's
menu system. Files are sorted by:
.
Playlists
.
Artists
.
Albums
.
Genres
.
Songs
.
Composers
To select files:
1. Press the softkey below
h.
f to scroll through the list of menus.
Press f to select the desired menu.
Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in the
2. Turn
3.
4.
selected menu.
5. Press
f to select the desired file to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
Repeat Functionality
To use Repeat:
Press the softkey below " or
Repeat All and Repeat Track.
' to select between
" (Repeat All):
Press the softkey below " to repeat
all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All
is being used. This is the default mode when a USB
storage device or iPod is first connected.
' (Repeat Track):
Press the softkey below ' to
repeat one track. The tab appears raised when Repeat
Track is being used.
4-105
Shuffle Functionality
To use Shuffle:
Press the softkey below >, 2, < or = to
select between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle
Songs, Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.
> (Shuffle Off): Press the softkey below 2 to
turn shuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB
storage device or iPod is first connected.
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press the
softkey below = or < to shuffle all songs on the
USB storage device or iPod.
< (Shuffle Album):
Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage
device.
4-106
Using an MP3
(Radios with CD and DVD)
Format
The radio can play .mp3 or .wma files that were
recorded onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
The USB port can play .mp3 and .wma files that are
stored on a USB storage device as well as AAC files
that are stored on an iPod®.
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
The radio plays discs that contain both uncompressed
CD audio and MP3/WMA files depending on which slot
the disc is loaded into.
The DVD Player only reads uncompressed audio and
ignores MP3/WMA files on a mixed mode disc.
The CD Player reads both uncompressed audio and
MP3/WMA files on a mixed mode disc. Uncompressed
audio is played before MP3/WMA files. Press the CAT
(category) button to toggle between uncompressed
audio and MP3/WMA files.
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File and Folder
Structure
The DVD Player supports:
USB Supported File and Folder Structure
The radio supports:
.
Up to 700 folders.
Up to 255 folders.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
Up to 65,535 files.
.
Up to 15 playlists.
.
Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.
.
Up to 40 sessions.
.
Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
.
AAC files stored on an iPod.
.
Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension.
.
FAT16
.
FAT32
.
The CD Player supports:
.
Up to 512 files and folders.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
.
Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension.
Root Directory
The root directory of the disc is treated as a folder. If the
root directory has compressed audio files, the directory
displays as F1 ROOT on the radio.
If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio and
MP3/WMA files, a folder under the root directory called
CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc.
4-107
Empty Folder
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the
player advances to the next folder that contains files.
Tracks are played in the following order:
.
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
.
Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
No Folder
When the disc contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not function on a disc that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the disc contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists first and then goes to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
Order of Play
Compressed audio files are accessed in the following
order:
.
Playlists.
.
Files stored in the root directory.
.
Files stored in folders in the root directory.
4-108
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of text
and the extension of the filename does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited using
the radio. These playlists are treated as special folders
containing compressed audio song files.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are
stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio
with a USB port.
Playing an MP3/WMA File From a Disc
(In Either the DVD or CD Slot)
If a disc is inserted into the top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use the
remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only).
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA files.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if less
than five seconds have played. Press to go to the
previous track if more then five seconds have played.
Press and hold or press multiple times to continue
moving backward through tracks.
¨ SEEK:
Press to go to the next track. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume
and the elapsed time of the file displays. Release
s REV to resume playing.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume
and the elapsed time of the file displays. Release
\ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the softkey below
S c to go to the first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below c T to
go to the first track in the next folder.
RDM (Random): Files on the disc can be listened to in
random, rather than sequential order. To use random,
press the softkey under the RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays to play songs in random order.
Press the same softkey again to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator):
Press the softkey below
to play files in order by artist or album.
h
The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and
album ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes
to scan the disc depending on the number of files on
the disc. The radio may begin playing while it is
scanning in the background.
4-109
When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files
in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on
the second line of the display. Once all songs by that
artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.
Connecting a USB Storage Device
or iPod®
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey
located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the
next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the
artist displays.
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device to
the USB port located on the instrument panel or in the
center console.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album:
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab
from the sort screen.
3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to
the main music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the second line between
the arrows and songs from the current album begins to
play. Once all songs from that album have played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on
the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below
the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
4-110
The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB
storage device.
To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable
that came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector
and connect the other end to the USB port located in
the center console. If the vehicle is on and the USB
connection works, “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo
may appear on the iPod and iPod appears on the
radio's display. The iPod music appears on the radio’s
display and begins playing.
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle
if the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle's battery.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported, it
can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input
Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
Using the Radio to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
Using Softkeys to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod
using the radio buttons and knobs and display song
information on the radio’s display.
The five softkeys below the radio display are used to
control the functions listed below.
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨ SEEK:
Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
4 (Information):
Press to display additional information
about the selected track.
To use the softkeys:
1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio
display to display the functions listed below,
or press the softkey below the function if it is
currently displayed.
2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function
on it to use that function.
j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the
track. The tab appears raised when pause is being
used. Press the softkey below j again to resume
playback.
Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back
to the main display screen on an iPod, or the root
directory on a USB storage device.
c (Folder View):
Press the softkey below c to view
the contents of the current folder on the USB drive.
To browse and select files:
1. Press the softkey below
2. Turn
c.
f to scroll through the list of folders.
4-111
3. Press f to select the folder. If there is more than
one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the folder is
reached.
4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selected
folder.
5. Press
f to select the file to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
h (Music Navigator):
Press the softkey below h
to view and select a file on an iPod, using the iPod's
menu system. Files are sorted by:
.
Playlists
.
Artists
.
Albums
4-112
.
Genres
.
Songs
.
Composers
To select files:
1. Press the softkey below
h.
f to scroll through the list of menus.
Press f to select the menu.
Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in the
2. Turn
3.
4.
selected menu.
5. Press
f to select the file to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
Repeat Functionality
XM Radio Messages
To use Repeat:
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer's request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Press the softkey below " or
Repeat All and Repeat Track.
' to select between
" (Repeat All):
Press the softkey below " to repeat
all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All is
being used. This is the default mode when a USB
storage device or iPod is first connected.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
' (Repeat Track):
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
Shuffle Functionality
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Press the softkey below ' to
repeat one track. The tab appears raised when Repeat
Track is being used.
To use Shuffle:
Press the softkey below >, 2, < or = to
select between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle
Songs, Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.
> (Shuffle Off): This is the default mode when a USB
storage device or iPod is first connected.
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Shuffles all
songs on the USB storage device or iPod.
< (Shuffle Album):
Shuffles all songs in the current
album on an iPod.
= (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all songs in the current
folder on a USB storage device.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth : This channel is blocked or cannot
be received with your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
4-113
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
No CAT Info: No category information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have
a fault. Consult with your dealer.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
Navigation/Radio System
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having the
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with
your dealer.
Check Antenna: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver or antenna could
have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
4-114
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the
separate Navigation System manual.
Bluetooth®
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make
and receive phone calls. The system can be used while
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m
(30 ft). Not all phones support all functions, and not all
phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth for
more information on compatible phones.
Voice Recognition
Bluetooth Controls
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to
interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers
and name tags.
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑136 for more
information.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if
there is too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
Audio System
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle's front audio system
speakers and overrides the audio system. Use the
audio system volume knob, during a call, to change
the volume level. The adjusted volume level remains
in memory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a
minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected
to the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell
phone manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made using OnStar®
Hands‐Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.
4-115
Pairing Information:
.
Up to five cell phones can be paired to the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system.
.
The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
.
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
.
Only one paired cell phone can be connected to
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
.
Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on this
process.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in
the list on the cellular phone and follow the
instructions on the cell phone to enter the four
digit PIN number that was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
4-116
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>? Yes
or No” followed by a tone.
.
If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
.
If another phone is not found, the original
phone remains connected.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
.
Store
.
Digit Store
.
Directory
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
4-117
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
.
If the system recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Storing” and repeats
the phone number.
.
If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats
the number followed by “Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. If the
number is not correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be re‐entered.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
4-118
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
.
If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
.
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
.
If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
.
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
.
If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
.
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
.
Delete
.
Delete all name tags
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
4-119
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete,
<name tag>? Please say yes or no”.
.
.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with
“OK, deleting <name tag>, returning to the
main menu.”
If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”.
The system responds with “No. OK, let's try
again, please say the name tag.”
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
.
Dial
.
Digit Dial
.
Call
.
Re‐dial
Using the Dial Command
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>”. “Number please” followed by
a tone.
To use the delete all name tags command:
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
.
Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
.
Say “No” to cancel the function and return to
the main menu.
4-120
.
If the system recognizes the number, it
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number.
.
If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re‐entered.
Using the Digit Dial Command
Using the Call Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
.
If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
.
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
.
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
.
If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by
a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling, <name
tag>” and dials the number. If the name tag is
not correct, say “No”. The system will ask for
the name tag to be re‐entered.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
4-121
Using the Re‐dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The system responds
with “Re‐dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
.
.
b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
Press c x to ignore a call.
Press
4-122
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
.
Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
.
Press
.
To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
.
Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
b g again to return to the original call.
Three‐Way Calling
To Mute a call
Three‐Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
1. While on a call press b g. The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three‐way call”. The system responds with
“Three‐way call, please say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected, press
the callers together.
b g to link all
Ending a Call
Press c x to end a call.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the in‐vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
4-123
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes
after the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY position.
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
Sending a Number During a Call
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice Pass‐Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.
.
4-124
The cell phone's normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone's
operating instructions.
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
.
If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
.
If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
.
.
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The
system responds with “OK, Sending <name
tag>” and the dial tones are sent and the call
continues.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in‐vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and
phone pairing information. For information on how to
delete this information, see the above sections on
Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19 for FCC
information.
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the
vehicle's audio system. The DVD player is part of the
front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a
DVD player, a video display screen, audio/video jacks,
two wireless headphones, a remote control, and if the
vehicle has a third row seat, it may have a second
video display screen and two additional wireless
headphones. See Radio(s) on page 4‑82 for more
information on the vehicle's audio/DVD system.
4-125
Before Driving
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE
system might not work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating range for the RSE
system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below 140°F (60°C).
If the temperature of the vehicle is outside of this range,
heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within
the operating range of the RSE system.
Parental Control
The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature,
depending on which radio the vehicle has. To enable
Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button
for more than two seconds to stop all system features
such as: radio, video screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.
While Parental Control is on, a padlock icon displays.
The radio can be turned back on with a single press of
the power button, but the RSE system will remain under
Parental Control.
To turn Parental Control off, press and hold the radio
power button for more than two seconds. The RSE
returns from where it was previously left and the
padlock icon disappears from the radio display.
4-126
Parental Control can also be turned off by inserting or
ejecting any disc, pressing the play icon on the radio
DVD display menu, or changing an ignition position.
Headphones
The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones
that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is
dedicated to the DVD player, while Channel 2 is
dedicated to RSA selections. These headphones are
used to listen to media such as CDs, DVDs, MP3s,
DVDAs, radio, any auxiliary source connected to A/V
jacks, or the auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has this
feature. The wireless headphones have an On/Off
button, channel 1/2 switch, and a volume control.
If the vehicle has a third row video screen display,
it may have two additional headphones.
Push the power button to turn on the headphones.
An indicator light located on the headphones comes
on. If the light comes on but there is intermittent sound
and/or static on the headphones, or if the indicator light
does not come on, the batteries might need to be
replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section for more information. Switch the headphones
to Off when not in use.
Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the
RSE overhead console. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery power if the RSE
system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters for more than
three minutes. If you move too far forward or step out
of the vehicle, the headphones lose the audio signal.
The headphones may automatically turn off after
four hours of continuous use.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
For optimal audio performance, the headphones must
be worn correctly. Headphones should be worn with
headband over the top of the head for best audio
reception. The symbol L (Left) appears on the upper left
side, above the ear pad and should be positioned on
the left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears on the upper
right side, above the ear pad and should be positioned
on the right ear.
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. See your dealer
for more information.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries on the headphones:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the
battery door open.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door
screw.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry
place.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
4-127
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks
and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen
power on. If the video screen is in the DVD player
mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the
remote control switches the video screen from the
DVD player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can
listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device by
sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio(s) on page 4‑82 for
more information.
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor console,
allow audio or video signals to be connected from an
auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game
unit to the RSE system. Adapter connectors or cables
(not included) might be required to connect the auxiliary
device to the A/V jacks. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for proper usage.
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A) is
for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the left
audio input. The red jack (C) is for the right audio input.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the radio
system.
4-128
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language can be
changed from the on screen setup menu. To change
any feature:
1. Press the
control.
z (display menu) button on the remote
2. Use the remote control n, q, p, o (navigation)
arrows and the r (enter) button to use the
setup menu.
3. Press the z button again to remove the setup
menu from the screen.
Audio Output
Video Screen(s)
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be
heard through the following possible sources:
The video screen(s) are located in the overhead
console.
.
Wireless Headphones
.
Vehicle Speakers
.
Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
audio system, if the vehicle has this feature.
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to
the wireless headphones, if there is audio available.
See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more
information.
The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the RSA system, if the
vehicle has this feature. The DVD player can be
selected as an audio source on the RSA system.
See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 4‑134 for more
information.
When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or the
radio's auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has this
feature, the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio
from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired
headphones. The front seat passengers are able to
listen to playback from this device through the vehicle
speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
To use the video screen(s):
1. Push the release button located on the overhead
console.
2. Move the screen to the desired position.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen remains on, this is normal, and the
DVD continues to play through the previous audio
source. Use the remote control power button or eject
the disc to turn off the screen.
The overhead console contains the infrared transmitters
for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers
for the remote control. They are located at the rear of
the console.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
4-129
Remote Control
Remote Control Buttons
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the overhead console and press
the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light
could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive
signals from the remote control. If the remote control
does not seem to be working, the batteries might need
to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section. Objects blocking the line of sight could also
affect the function of the remote control.
O (Power):
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote
control power button can be used to turn on the video
screen display and start the disc. The radio can also
turn on the video screen display. See Radio(s) on
page 4‑82 for more information.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs will
not be covered by the warranty. Storage in extreme
cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the remote
control stored in a cool, dry place.
4-130
Press this button to turn the video screen
on and off.
P (Illumination):
Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight automatically turns
off after seven to ten seconds if no other button is
pressed while the backlight is on.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD. This function may vary for
each disc.
y (Main Menu):
Press this button to access the DVD
menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use
the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the
DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter
button. This button only operates when using a DVD.
n, q , p , o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter):
Press this button to select the choice that
is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Menu):
Press this button to adjust the
brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom),
and display the language menu.
q (Return):
Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button operates only when the display menu or a DVD
menu is active.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, fast
reversing, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause):
Press this button to start playing a
DVD. Press this button while a DVD is playing to pause
it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD.
On some radios, play may be slowed down by pressing
the play/pause button then pressing the fast forward
button when the DVD is playing. The DVD continues
playing in a slow play mode. Some radios may perform
reverse slow play by pressing the play/pause button
and then pressing the fast reverse button. To cancel
slow play mode, press the play/pause button.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to go to the previous track or chapter.
This button might not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go to
the beginning of the next chapter or track. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
press the play button. To stop fast reversing a DVD
audio or CD, release this button. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
[ (Fast Forward):
Press this button to fast forward the
DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD video, press
the play/pause button. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
audio or CD, release this button. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
e (Audio):
Press this button to change audio tracks on
DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function vary for
each disc.
{ (Subtitles):
Press this button to turn ON/OFF
subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this function
vary for each disc.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
4-131
d (Camera):
Press this button to change camera
angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function vary for
each disc.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter or track number
selection.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry
place.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
The ignition might not
be turned ON/RUN or in
ACC/ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the
screen. There are black
borders on the top and
bottom or on both sides or
it looks stretched out.
Check the display mode
settings in the setup menu
by pressing the display
menu button on the remote
control.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
The remote control does
not work.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and
the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
\ (Clear):
Press this button within three seconds after
entering a numeric selection, to clear all numerical
inputs.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries):
Press this button to select
chapter or track numbers greater than nine. Press this
button before entering the number.
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a new
universal remote control can be purchased. If this
happens, make sure the universal remote control uses
a code set of Toshiba®.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries:
1. Slide the rear cover back on to the remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly,
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Replace the battery cover.
4-132
Recommended Action
No power.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)
Problem
After stopping the player,
I push Play but sometimes
the DVD starts where I left
off and sometimes at the
beginning.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts out
or buzzes.
Recommended Action
If the stop button was
pressed one time, the DVD
player resumes playing
where the DVD was
stopped. If the stop button
was pressed two times the
DVD player begins to play
from the beginning of
the DVD.
Check that the RSE video
screen is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Check for obstructions, low
batteries, reception range,
and interference from
cellular telephone towers
or by using a cellular
telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones
are on correctly using the
L (left) and R (right) on the
headphones.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)
Problem
I lost the remote and/or the
headphones.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
Recommended Action
See your dealer for
assistance.
Check that the RSE video
screen is sourced to the
DVD player.
DVD Display Error Messages
The DVD display error message depends on which
radio is in the vehicle. The video screen can display
one of the following:
Disc Load/Eject Error: Displays when there are disc
load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: Displays if the disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: Displays if the disc is not from a
correct region.
No Disc Inserted: Displays if no disc is present when
EJECT or DVD AUX is pressed on the radio.
4-133
DVD Distortion
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Video distortion can occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
Vehicles with this feature allow the rear seat
passengers to listen to and control any of the music
sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources.
However, the rear seat passengers can only control
the music sources the front seat passengers are not
listening to (except on some radios where dual control
is allowed). For example, rear seat passengers can
control and listen to a CD through the headphones,
while the driver listens to the radio through the front
speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of
the volume for each set of headphones.
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use
only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage could
result.
4-134
The radio functionality is controlled by both the RSA
and the front radio. Only one band can be tuned to at
one time. Changing the band on the RSA or the front
radio will change the band on the other system, if they
are both sourced to the radio.
The RSA functions operate even when the main radio is
off. The front audio system will display the headphone
icon when the RSA is on, and will disappear from the
display when it is off.
Audio can be heard through wired headphones (not
included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA. If the
vehicle has this feature, audio can also be heard on
Channel 2 of the wireless headphones.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if the
vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and
rear auxiliary.
The audio system mutes the rear speakers when the
RSA audio is active through the headphones.
© ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM™
(if equipped), press the left © or right ¨ seek arrow to
go to the previous or to the next station or channel and
stay there. This function is inactive, with some radios,
if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
Press and hold the left © or right ¨ seek arrow until
the display flashes, to tune to an individual station.
The display stops flashing after the buttons have not
been pushed for more than two seconds. This function
is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
P (Power): Press the
or off.
P button to turn the RSA on
Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the
volume of the wired headphones. The left knob controls
the left headphones and the right knob controls the right
headphones.
While listening to a disc, press the left © seek arrow
to go back to the start of the current track or chapter
(if more than ten seconds have played). Press the
right ¨ seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter
on the disc. This function is inactive, with some radios,
if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
left © or right ¨ seek arrow to perform a cursor up or
down on the menu. Hold the left © or right ¨ arrow to
perform a cursor left or right on the menu.
4-135
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next
preset radio station or channel set on the main radio.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front
seat passengers are listening to the radio.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending
on the vehicle's options.
Some audio controls
can be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this
button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front
seat passengers are listening to the disc.
When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer, press
this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs are
loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
PROG button to perform the menu function, enter.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
®
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
w / x (Next / Previous):
Press to select preset or
favorite radio stations, select tracks on a CD/DVD,
or to navigate an iPod® or USB device.
Radio
To select preset or favorite radio stations:
Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous
radio station stored as a preset or favorite.
4-136
CD/DVD
To select tracks on a CD/DVD:
Press and release
track.
w or x to go to the next or previous
Select tracks on an iPod or USB Device
(Vehicles without a Navigation System)
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down the
list, then press and hold w, or press ¨ to play the
highlighted track.
Navigating folders on an iPod or USB
Device (Vehicles without a Navigation
System):
3. Press and release
the list.
w or x to scroll up or down
.
To select a folder, press and hold w, or press
¨ when the folder is highlighted.
.
To go back further in the folder list, press and
hold x.
Navigating an iPod or USB Device on the
Main Audio Screen (Vehicles with a
Navigation System)
Press and release w or x to select the next or
previous track within the selected category.
Press and hold
tracks.
w or x to move quickly through the
Press and release
selected category.
¨ to move up one track within the
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
2. Press and hold
folder list.
x to go back to the previous
4-137
Navigating an iPod or USB Device on the
Music Navigator Screen (Vehicles with a
Navigation System)
¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next radio station while in
AM, FM, or XM™.
Press and release w or x to select the next or
previous track within the selected category.
Press ¨ to go to the next track or chapter while
sourced to the CD or DVD slot.
Press and hold w or x to move quickly through the
tracks within the selected category.
Press ¨ to select a track or a folder when navigating
folders on an iPod or USB device.
Press and release
selected category.
¨ to move up one track within the
b g (Mute/Push to Talk):
Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar ® systems, press
and hold for longer than two seconds to interact with
those systems. See Bluetooth® on page 4‑114 and the
OnStar Owner's Guide for more information.
c (End): Press to reject an incoming call, or end a
current call.
SRCE (Source/Voice Recognition): Press to switch
between the radio, CD, and for vehicles with, DVD, front
auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
For vehicles with the navigation system, press and hold
this button for longer than one second to initiate voice
recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the Navigation
System manual for more information.
4-138
For vehicles with or without a navigation system:
For vehicles with a navigation system:
1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep is heard, to place
the radio into SCAN mode, a station will play for
five seconds before moving to the next station.
¨ again.
While listening to a CD/DVD, press and hold ¨ to
2. To stop the SCAN function, press
quickly move forward through the tracks. Release to
stop on the desired track.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the volume.
Radio Reception
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills
can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or
standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages,
or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a
period of time.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
FM Stereo
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with
the vehicle's radio. This interference may occur
when making or receiving phone calls, charging
the phone's battery, or simply having the phone on.
This interference causes an increased level of static
while listening to the radio. If static is received while
listening to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and
turn it off.
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
4-139
Rear Side Window Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is located in the passenger rear
side windows. Make sure the inside surfaces of the rear
side windows are not scratched and that the lines on
the glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaces are
damaged, they could interfere with radio reception.
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside of the rear side windows may affect radio
reception or damage the rear side window antenna.
Repairs would not be covered by the warranty.
Do not clear the inside of the rear side windows
with sharp objects.
4-140
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to the antenna
due to metallic tinting materials will not be covered
by the warranty.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Section 5
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Driving at Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Before Leaving on a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autoride® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26
5-26
5-27
5-29
5-30
5-30
5-31
5-37
5-41
5-41
5-41
5-48
5-48
5-49
5-69
5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the
Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 2‑32.
{ WARNING:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
.
Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
5-2
Drunk Driving
{ WARNING:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have
been associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Braking
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑36.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if
the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of
the vehicle. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4.
If the vehicle is a Two‐mode Hybrid, see the Two‐mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three‐fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three‐fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels
20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
5-3
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts, heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking,
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake.
The brakes might not have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot
of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take
longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4.
5-4
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent
a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on.
This is normal.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on
page 4‑37.
Along with ABS, the vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights come on
accompanied by a 10‐second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned
on until the problem is repaired. See your dealer for
service.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing
down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling,
the computer will separately work the brakes at each
front wheel and at both rear wheels.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help the
driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more
than even the very best braking.
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature
uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module
to supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down
the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control
module increases brake pressure at each corner of
the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal
pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal
and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist
feature will automatically disengage when the brake
pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The brakes might
vibrate or some noise might be heard, but this is
normal.
5-5
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement system
called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer controlled
system that assists the driver with directional control of
the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the
vehicle's brakes to assist the driver with keeping the
vehicle on the intended path.
When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
system performs several diagnostic checks to insure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
In some cases, it may take approximately two miles of
driving before the system initializes.
5-6
If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak
activates, the cruise control automatically disengages.
The cruise control can be re-engaged when road
conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 4‑7.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the
StabiliTrak light along with one of the following
messages will be displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC): TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE
TRACTION CONTROL, STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE
STABILITRAK. If these DIC messages appear, make
sure the StabiliTrak system has not been turned off
using the StabiliTrak on/off button. Then turn the
steering wheel clockwise from the nine o'clock
position to the three o'clock position. If this clears the
message(s), the vehicle does not need servicing. If this
does not clear the message(s), then turn the vehicle off,
wait 15 seconds, and then turn it back on again to reset
the system. If any of these messages still appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), the vehicle should be
taken in for service. For more information on the DIC
messages, see Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑47.
The StabiliTrak light will
flash on the instrument
panel cluster when the
system is both on and
activated.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working; this
is normal.
The traction control
disable button is located
on the instrument panel
below the climate
controls.
The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned
off by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if
both systems (traction control and StabiliTrak) were
previously on. To disable both traction control and
StabiliTrak, press and hold the button for five seconds.
Traction control and StabiliTrak can be turned on by
pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if not
automatically shut off for any other reason.
When the TCS or StabiliTrak system is turned off,
the StabiliTrak light and the appropriate TCS off or
StabiliTrak off message will be displayed on the DIC to
warn the driver. The vehicle will still have brake-traction
control when traction control is off, but will not be able
to use the engine speed management system. See
“Traction Control Operation” next for more information.
When the traction control system has been turned off,
system noises may still be heard as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5‑29.
5-7
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by
reducing engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when the vehicle is started. It will activate and the
StabiliTrak light will flash if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction
while driving. If traction control is turned off, only the
brake-traction control portion of traction control will
work. The engine speed management will be disabled.
In this mode, engine power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This can
cause the brake-traction control to activate constantly.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle is allowed to spin
excessively while the StabiliTrak, ABS and brake
warning lights and any relevant DIC messages are
displayed, the transfer case could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin
the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
messages are displayed.
5-8
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction in
acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration may
be heard. This is normal.
If cruise control is being used when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak light will flash and cruise
control will automatically disengage. Cruise control
may be reengaged when road conditions allow.
See Cruise Control on page 4‑7.
StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself after restarting
the vehicle, see your dealer for service.
Locking Rear Axle
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction
on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a
standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low,
this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle.
Steering
Steering in Emergencies
Power Steering
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right in front of you.
These problems can be avoided by braking — if you
can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time
because there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
If the vehicle is a Two‐mode Hybrid, see the Two‐mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First, apply the brakes. See Braking on
page 5‑3. It is better to remove as much speed as
possible from a collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
5-9
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and
a quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, it can be
turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
5-10
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches),
about one-eighth turn, until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Passing
Skidding
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by
not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
.
Look down the road, to the sides, and to
crossroads for situations that might affect a
successful pass. If in doubt, wait.
.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double‐solid line on your
side of the lane.
.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
.
Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
.
When you are being passed, ease to the right.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle's
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Loss of Control
Remember: StabiliTrak® helps avoid only the
acceleration skid. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 5‑6. If the StabiliTrak® System is off, then an
acceleration skid is best handled by easing your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
5-11
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the
braking skid.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off‐road usage.
Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving
speeds, especially on rough terrain.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road and this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving skills,
your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
Off-roading can be great fun but has some definite
hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. When
off-road driving, traffic lanes are not marked, curves are
not banked, and there are no road signs. Surfaces can
be slippery, rough, uphill, or downhill.
Off-Road Driving
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers. Failure to
operate the vehicle correctly off‐road could result in loss
of vehicle control or vehicle rollover.
Vehicles with four-wheel drive can be used for off-road
driving. Vehicles without four-wheel drive and vehicles
with 20‐inch tire/wheel assemblies should not be driven
off-road except on a level, solid surface.
Off-roading involves some new skills. That is why it is
very important that you read these driving tips and
suggestions to help make off-road driving safer and
more enjoyable.
5-12
Before You Go Off-Roading
To remove the air dam:
Have all necessary maintenance and service
work done.
1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts.
.
Make sure there is enough fuel, that fluid levels are
where they should be, and that the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, is fully inflated.
3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps are
disengaged, push forward on the air dam until it
is free.
.
Be sure to read all the information about
four-wheel-drive vehicles in this manual.
.
Make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle has
them, are properly attached.
.
Know the local laws that apply to off-roading where
you will be driving or check with law enforcement
people in the area.
.
.
Be sure to get the necessary permission if you will
be on private land.
2. With a flat‐blade tool, disengage the snaps.
Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended periods
without the front fascia lower air dam installed can
cause improper air flow to the engine. Always be
sure to replace the front fascia air dam when you
are finished off-road driving.
After off-roading, be sure to reinstall the air dam:
1. Line up the snaps and push the air dam rearward
to engage the snaps.
2. Install the two outboard bolts.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance
at the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front
fascia lower air dam. The air dam is held in place by
two bolts and 10 snaps accessible from underneath the
front fascia.
5-13
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
WARNING: (Continued)
.
{ WARNING:
.
Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the
seatbacks can be thrown forward during a
sudden stop. You or your passengers could
be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the
seatbacks.
.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough terrain.
You or your passengers can be struck by
flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.
(Continued)
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle's
center of gravity, making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if
the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside
the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo
in the cargo area as far forward and low as
possible.
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
.
The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward
of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward
as you can.
.
Be sure the load is properly secured, so things are
not tossed around.
You will find other important information under Loading
the Vehicle on page 5‑31 and Tires on page 6‑63.
5-14
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the
environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Check to see if
there are any blocked or closed roads.
.
.
Always use established trails, roads, and areas
that have been specially set aside for public
off-road recreational driving and obey all posted
regulations.
Avoid any driving practice that could damage
shrubs, flowers, trees, or grasses or disturb
wildlife. This includes wheel-spinning, breaking
down trees, or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground.
.
Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse
is removed from any campsite before leaving.
.
Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves, and lanterns.
.
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle's exhaust system.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle in case something happens to one of them.
For vehicles with a winch, be sure to read the winch
instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if
you get stuck but you will want to know how to use it
properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-roading requires some new and different skills.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.
Your eyes need to constantly sweep the terrain for
unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. Use your arms, hands,
feet, and body to respond to vibrations and vehicle
bounce.
5-15
Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control the vehicle is to
control the speed. At higher speeds:
.
You approach things faster and have less time to
react.
.
There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles.
.
The vehicle has more bounce when driving over
obstacles.
.
More braking distance is needed, especially on an
unpaved surface.
{ WARNING:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw you
out of position. This could cause you to lose
control and crash. So, whether you are driving on
or off the road, you and your passengers should
wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. Be familiar with the terrain and its many
different features.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading surfaces can be
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle's
steering, acceleration, and braking in different ways.
Depending on the surface, slipping, sliding, wheel
spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and
longer braking distances can occur.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles
can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can
startle you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself.
Some things to consider:
.
Is the path ahead clear?
.
Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
.
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
.
Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
When driving over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands.
5-16
When driving over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, the
wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even with
one or two wheels, you cannot control the vehicle as
well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
Off-roading requires a different kind of alertness from
driving on paved roads and highways. There are no
road signs, posted speed limits, or signal lights. Use
good judgment about what is safe and what is not.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, decide if it is too steep to
climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to
judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be
a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to the
top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you
near the top, but you might not see this because the
crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
Consider this as you approach a hill:
.
Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
.
Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
.
Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
.
Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
.
What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way
to find out.
.
Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Driving on Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and
an understanding of what the vehicle can and cannot
do. There are some hills that simply cannot be driven,
no matter how well built the vehicle.
{ WARNING:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If you
drive across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, do not drive the hill.
5-17
Driving Uphill
Once you decide it is safe to drive up the hill:
.
Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
.
Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
speed. Not using more power than needed can
avoid spinning the wheels or sliding.
.
Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
.
Use headlamps even during the day to make the
vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic.
{ WARNING:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can
cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle.
You could be seriously injured or killed. As you
near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
{ WARNING:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills,
always try to go straight up.
.
Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
.
Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
.
Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to
approaching traffic on trails or hills.
5-18
If the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot
make it up the hill:
.
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards and apply the parking
brake.
.
If the engine is still running, shift the transmission
to R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in R (Reverse).
.
If the engine has stopped running, you need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission
to P (Park) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill as straight as possible in
R (Reverse).
.
While backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position
so you can tell if the wheels are straight and can
maneuver as you back down. It is best to back
down the hill with the wheels straight rather than in
the left or right direction. Turning the wheel too far
to the left or right will increase the possibility of a
rollover.
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall,
when going up a hill:
.
Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
N (Neutral) to rev-up the engine and regain forward
momentum. This will not work. The vehicle can roll
backward very quickly and could go out of control.
.
Never try to turn around if about to stall when
going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall
the vehicle, it is steep enough to cause it to roll
over. If you cannot make it up the hill, back straight
down the hill.
If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide
you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put your
transmission in P (Park), and turn off the engine. Leave
the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side
and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it
rolled downhill. If the vehicle has a transfer case with
a N (Neutral) position, do not shift the transfer case
to Neutral when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in
some gear.
{ WARNING:
If the vehicle has the two‐speed automatic
transfer case, shifting the transfer case to
Neutral can cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in P (Park). This is because the
Neutral position on the transfer case overrides
the transmission. You or someone else could be
injured. If you are going to leave your vehicle,
set the parking brake and shift the transmission
to P (Park). But, if the vehicle has a two‐speed
automatic transfer case, do not shift the transfer
case to Neutral.
5-19
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, consider:
.
How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to
maintain vehicle control?
.
What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
.
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
.
What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large
rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, try to keep
the vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear so
engine drag can help the brakes so they do not have to
do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping the vehicle
under control at all times.
{ WARNING:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could
cause loss of control and a serious accident.
Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill
and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under
control.
5-20
Things not to do when driving down a hill:
.
When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down might be too steep to drive
across. The vehicle could roll over.
.
Never go downhill with the transmission in
N (Neutral), called free-wheeling. The brakes
will have to do all the work and could overheat
and fade.
Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill,
but if it happens when going downhill:
1. Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes
and apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
.
Surface conditions can be a problem. Loose
gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can
cause the tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the
vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
will trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
.
Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop
into a rut or depression, the vehicle can tilt
even more.
An off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a
hill. To decide whether to try to drive across the incline,
consider the following:
{ WARNING:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness of the incline, do not drive
across it. Find another route instead.
.
A hill that can be driven straight up or down
might be too steep to drive across. When going
straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel
base — the distance from the front wheels to the
rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle
will tumble end over end. But when driving across
an incline, the narrower track width — the distance
between the left and right wheels — might not
prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels which could cause a downhill slide
or a rollover.
For these reasons, carefully consider whether to try
to drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes
across the incline does not mean you have to drive it.
The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn
downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and
prevent the side slipping. The best way to prevent this
is to “walk the course” first, so you know what the
surface is like before driving it.
5-21
Stalling on an Incline
{ WARNING:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline, be sure
you, and any passengers, get out on the uphill side,
even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out
on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over,
you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels do
not get good traction. Acceleration is not as quick,
turning is more difficult, and braking distances are
longer.
5-22
It is best to use a low gear when in mud — the deeper
the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud, keep
the vehicle moving so it does not get stuck.
When driving on sand, wheel traction changes.
On loosely packed sand, such as on beaches or
sand dunes, the tires will tend to sink into the sand.
This affects steering, accelerating, and braking. Drive
at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And, if the vehicle does
get moving, poor steering and difficult braking can
cause it to slide out of control.
{ WARNING:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice.
Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you
and your passengers could drown. Drive your
vehicle on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
{ WARNING:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown. If it
is only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive
through rushing water.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before driving through it.
Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel
hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe — you probably will not get
through. Deep water can damage the axle and other
vehicle parts.
get the tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is under
water, you will never be able to start the engine.
When going through water, remember that when
the brakes get wet, it might take longer to stop.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 5‑24.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected
on the underbody, chassis, or under the hood.
These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system
for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system
for any leakage.
The vehicle requires more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system
and the vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
5-23
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep‐standing or
flowing water.
Night driving tips include:
.
Drive defensively.
.
Do not drink and drive.
.
Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
.
Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light
up so much road ahead.
.
Watch for animals.
.
When tired, pull off the road.
.
Do not wear sunglasses.
.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
.
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
5-24
{ WARNING:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal
until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer before departing.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
Pass with caution.
.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 6‑63.
.
Turn off cruise control.
Things to check on your own include:
.
Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
.
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
.
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
.
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
.
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
.
Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
5-25
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe
place to park your vehicle and rest.
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in
these conditions include:
Other driving tips include:
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
.
Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
.
Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{ WARNING:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
5-26
{ WARNING:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always have
the engine running and the vehicle in gear when
going downhill.
.
.
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that
let you stay in your own lane.
Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
See Off-Road Driving on page 5‑12 for information
about driving off-road.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can
be treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
The StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6 improves the
ability to accelerate on slippery roads, but slow down
and adjust your driving to the road conditions. When
driving through deep snow, turn off the traction control
part of the StabiliTrak® System to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5‑4
improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a
slippery roads, but apply the brakes sooner than
when on dry pavement.
5-27
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
WARNING: (Continued)
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.
Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
.
Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
.
Open a window about 5 cm (two inches) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7.
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3.
Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
.
{ WARNING:
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
(Continued)
5-28
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑52.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
(Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle
and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as
little as possible to save fuel.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5‑30.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
{ WARNING:
If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6‑86.
5-29
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive vehicles,
shift into Four‐Wheel High or, if the vehicle has a
two‐speed automatic transfer case, Four‐Wheel Low.
For vehicles with StabiliTrak®, turn the traction control
part of the system off. Shift back and forth between
R (Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after
a few tries, it might need to be towed out. Recovery
hooks can be used, if the vehicle has them. If the
vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 5‑41.
5-30
Recovery Hooks
{ WARNING:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force.
Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on
the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could
break off and you or others could be injured from
the chain or cable snapping back.
Loading the Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it
would not be covered by warranty.
For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the
vehicle, you can use them if you are stuck off-road
and need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
5-31
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also
shows the size of the original equipment tires (C)
and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more information on tires and
inflation see Tires on page 6‑63 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑72.
There is also important loading information on
the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front
and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later
in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).
With the driver's door open, you will find the
label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
5-32
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49 for
important information on towing a trailer,
towing safety rules and trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
5-33
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
5-34
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
750 lbs (136 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading information
label for specific information about your
vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions.
The combined weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
Certification/Tire Label
the inflation pressures needed to obtain the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is
called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station
and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
The Certification/Tire label also contains
information about your Front Axle Reserve
Capacity.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver's door. The label
shows the size of your vehicle's original tires and
5-35
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Notice : Overloading the vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
The label will help you decide how much cargo
and installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your
vehicle the right way.
5-36
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there
is a crash, they will keep going.
{ WARNING:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
.
Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
.
Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
.
Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road
Driving on page 5‑12.
Some vehicles are built with a special snow plow prep
package, called RPO VYU. If your vehicle has this
option, you can add a plow to it, provided certain
weights, such as the weights on the vehicle's axles and
the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), are not exceeded.
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar
Equipment
The plow your vehicle can carry depends on many
things, such as:
Before installing a snow plow on your vehicle, here are
some things you will need to know:
Notice: If your vehicle does not have the snow plow
prep package, adding a plow can damage your
vehicle, and the repairs would not be covered by
warranty. Unless your vehicle was built to carry a
snow plow, do not add one to your vehicle. If your
vehicle has the snow plow prep package, called
RPO VYU, then the payload your vehicle can carry
will be reduced when a snow plow is installed. Your
vehicle can be damaged if either the front or rear
axle ratings or the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) are
exceeded.
.
The options your vehicle came with, and the
weight of those options.
.
The weight and number of passengers you intend
to carry.
.
The weight of items you have added to your
vehicle.
.
The total weight of any additional cargo you intend
to carry.
Say, for example, you have a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow.
The total weight of all occupants and cargo inside the
cab should not exceed 300 lb (135 kg). This means that
you may only be able to carry one passenger. But, even
this may be too much if you have got other equipment
already adding to the weight of your vehicle.
5-37
Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a snow
plow on your vehicle:
.
Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles
does not exceed the axle rating for each.
.
For the front axle, if more cargo or passengers
must be carried, appropriate counter ballast must
be installed rear of the rear axle. Counter ballast
must be properly secured so it will not move during
driving.
.
Follow the snow plow manufacturer's
recommendations regarding rear ballast.
Rear ballast may be required to ensure a
proper front and rear weight distribution ratio,
even though the actual weight at the front axle
may be less than the front axle rating.
.
The snow plow manufacturer or installer can assist
you in determining the amount of rear ballast
required, to help make sure your snowplow/vehicle
combination does not exceed the GVW rating, the
front and rear axle ratings, and the front and rear
weight distribution ratio.
.
The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW rating.
5-38
Front axle reserve capacity is the difference between
your front Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) and the
front axle weight of your vehicle with full fuel and
passengers. Basically, it is the amount of weight
you can add to your front axle before reaching your
front GAWR.
The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be
found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire
label, as shown.
United States
Canada
In order to calculate the amount of weight any front
accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to the front
axle, use the following formula:
Where:
W = Weight of added accessory
A = Distance that the accessory is in front of the
front axle
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase
For example, adding a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow
actually adds more than 700 lbs (318 kg) to the front
axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is 4 ft (122 cm)
in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 10 ft
(305 cm), then:
W = 700 lb (318 kg)
A = 4 ft (122 cm)
W.B. = 10 ft (305 cm)
(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 = 980 lbs
(445 kg)
So, if your vehicle's front axle reserve capacity is more
than 980 lbs (445 kg), you could add the snow plow
without exceeding the front GAWR.
(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory is adding
to the front axle.
5-39
You can add heavier equipment on the front of the
vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer
passengers, less cargo, or by positioning cargo towards
the rear. This has the effect of reducing the load on the
front. However, the front GAWR, rear GAWR, and the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) must never be
exceeded.
{ WARNING:
On some vehicles that have certain front mounted
equipment, such as a snow plow, it may be
possible to load the front axle to the front gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) but not have enough
weight on the rear axle to have proper braking
performance. If your brakes can not work properly,
you could have a crash. To help your brakes work
properly when a snow plow is installed, always
follow the snow plow manufacturer or installer's
recommendation for rear ballast to ensure a
proper front and rear weight distribution ratio,
even though the actual front weight may be less
than the front GAWR, and the total vehicle weight
is less than the gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR). Maintaining a proper front and rear
weight distribution ratio is necessary to provide
proper braking performance.
5-40
Total vehicle reserve capacity is the difference between
your GVWR and the weight of your vehicle with full fuel
and passengers. It is the amount of weight you can add
to your vehicle before reaching your GVWR. Keep in
mind that reserve capacity numbers are intended as
a guide when selecting the amount of equipment or
cargo your vehicle can carry. If you are unsure of your
vehicle's front, rear, or total weight, go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can also
help you with this.
The total vehicle reserve capacity for your vehicle can
be found in the lower right corner of the Certification/
Tire label as shown previously.
See your dealer for additional advice and information
about using a snow plow on your vehicle. Also, see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31.
Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep package
also have an emergency roof lamp provision package,
RPO TRW. Wiring for the emergency roof lamp is
provided above the overhead console. See Auxiliary
Roof-Mounted Lamp on page 4‑13 for switch location.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer
or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle
must be towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑7.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
.
What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
.
What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long
they can tow.
.
Is the proper towing equipment going to be
used? See your dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
.
Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 5‑25.
If the vehicle has a two–mode hybrid engine, see the
Two–mode Hybrid manual for more information.
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
5-41
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles and Four-Wheel
Drive Vehicles with a Single Speed
Automatic Transfer Case
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles and four-wheel drive vehicles
with a single speed automatic transfer case should
not be towed with all four wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions for
internal lubrication while being towed. Four-wheel drive
vehicles with a single speed automatic transfer case
have no neutral position and will spin the transmission
when the rear wheels turn.
5-42
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a Two
Speed Automatic Transfer Case
{ WARNING:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is
shifted to N (Neutral).
4. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
into Neutral” under “Four-Wheel Drive” for the
proper procedure to select the Neutral position
for the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a four-wheel
drive vehicle with a two speed automatic transfer case:
1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow
vehicle and shift the transmission to P (Park).
2. Turn the engine off and firmly set the parking
brake.
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the
key — the steering wheel will still turn.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
“Four-Wheel Drive” for the proper procedure to take
the vehicle out of the Neutral position.
3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
5-43
Dolly Towing
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the
Ground)
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles and Four-Wheel
Drive Vehicles with a Single Speed
Automatic Transfer Case
Notice: If a two-wheel drive vehicle or a four-wheel
drive vehicle with a single speed automatic transfer
case is towed with the rear wheels on the ground,
the transmission could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles and four-wheel drive vehicles
with a single speed automatic transfer case should
not be towed with the rear wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions for
internal lubrication while being towed. Four-wheel drive
vehicles with a single speed automatic transfer case
have no neutral position and will spin the transmission
when the rear wheels turn.
To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drive vehicle or a four-wheel
drive vehicle with a single speed automatic transfer
case, the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels
on the dolly. See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the
Ground)” later in this section for more information.
5-44
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a Two
Speed Automatic Transfer Case
{ WARNING:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is
shifted to N (Neutral).
5. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
into N (Neutral)” under “Four-Wheel Drive”.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer's instructions.
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four-wheel
drive vehicle from the front:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of N (Neutral)” under
“Four-Wheel Drive”.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5-45
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the
Ground)
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles and Four-Wheel
Drive Vehicles with a Single Speed
Automatic Transfer Case
Use the following procedure to dolly tow the vehicle
from the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3‑48.
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer's instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
7. For four-wheel drive vehicles with a single speed
automatic transfer case, turn the transfer case
knob to the Two-Wheel High position.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
5-46
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a
Two Speed Automatic Transfer Case
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four-wheel
drive vehicle from the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3‑48.
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer's instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
{ WARNING:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is
shifted to N (Neutral).
7. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
into N (Neutral)” under “Four-Wheel Drive”.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of N (Neutral)” under
“Four-Wheel Drive”.
5-47
Level Control
Autoride®
Automatic Level Control
With this feature, improved vehicle ride and handling is
provided under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions.
The automatic level control rear suspension is available
on light‐duty vehicles and comes as a part of the
Autoride® suspension, if equipped.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as
better handling under a variety of passenger and
loading conditions. An air compressor connected to
the rear shocks will raise or lower the rear of the
vehicle to maintain proper vehicle height. The system
is activated when the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN
and will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.
The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up
to ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned off.
You may hear the air compressor operating when the
height is being adjusted.
If a weight‐distributing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch.
5-48
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
Autoride also interacts with the tow/haul mode that,
when activated, will provide additional control of the
shock absorbers. This additional control results in better
ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is
loaded or towing a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49 for more information.
Towing a Trailer
If the vehicle has a two–mode hybrid engine, see the
Two–mode Hybrid manual for more information.
Do not tow a trailer during break‐in. See New Vehicle
Break-In on page 3‑27 for more information.
{ WARNING:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could
be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer for advice and information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your dealer
for important information about towing a trailer with
the vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later
in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
5-49
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
.
.
There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make
sure the rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial
police.
Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in
at the heavier loads.
.
.
5-50
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the
transmission to a lower gear if the transmission
shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions.
If the vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system and it doesn't seem to be working properly
while pulling a trailer, turn the system off. See Side
Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 3‑60 for more
information.
Important considerations that have to do with weight:
.
The weight of the trailer
.
The weight of the trailer tongue
.
The weight on the vehicle's tires
.
And the weight of the trailering combination
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how the rig is used. Speed, altitude,
road grades, outside temperature and how much the
vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment on the vehicle, and
the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section
for more information.
Trailer weight rating (TWR) is calculated assuming the
tow vehicle has only the driver but all required trailering
equipment. Weight of additional optional equipment,
passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be
subtracted from the trailer weight rating.
Use the following chart to determine how much the
vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and
options.
Vehicle
1500 Series 2WD Short Wheel Base
5.3L V8
5.3L V8
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
1500 Series 2WD Long Wheel Base
5.3L V8
5.3L V8
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
6.2L V8
1500 Series 4WD Short Wheel Base
5.3L V8
5.3L V8
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
3.08
5,400 lbs (2 449 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
3.42
5,900 lbs (2 676 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
3.42
8,400 lbs (3 810 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
3.08
5,100 lbs (2 313 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
3.42
5,600 lbs (2 540 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
3.42
8,100 lbs (3 674 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
3.42
8,100 lbs (3 674 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
3.08
5,200 lbs (2 359 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
3.42
5,700 lbs (2 586 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
3.42
8,200 lbs (3 720 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
5-51
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
1500 Series 4WD Long Wheel Base
5.3L V8
3.08
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
5.3L V8
3.42
5,400 lbs (2 449 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
3.42
7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6.2L V8
3.42
7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
2500 Series 2WD Long Wheel Base
6.0L V8
3.73
9,600 lbs (4 355 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
2500 Series 4WD Long Wheel Base
6.0L V8
3.73
9,300 lbs (4 218 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for trailering information or advice,
or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 8‑6 for
more information.
5-52
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is very important
because it is also part of the vehicle weight. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the people who will
be riding in the vehicle as well as trailer tongue weight.
Vehicle options, equipment, passengers and cargo in
the vehicle reduce the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer
weight the vehicle can tow. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑31 for more information about the vehicle's
maximum load capacity.
Trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent and fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight
should be 15 to 25 percent of the loaded trailer weight
up to the maximums for vehicle series and hitch type
shown below:
Vehicle Series
Hitch Type
1500
Weight Carrying
2500
Weight Carrying
1500
Weight Distributing
2500
Weight Distributing
Maximum
Tongue Weight
272 kg (600 lbs)
453 kg (1,000 lbs)
499 kg (1,100 lbs)
680 kg (1,500 lbs)
5-53
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that
will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will
help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the
rear axle.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle's ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue or kingpin weight cannot cause
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating). See “Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires”
later in this section for more information.
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires
Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the inflation
pressures found on the Certification label on the drivers
door or see Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31 for more
information. Make sure not to exceed the GVWR limit
for the vehicle, or the RGAWR, with the tow vehicle and
trailer fully loaded for the trip including the weight of the
trailer tongue. If using a weight distributing hitch, make
sure not to exceed the RGAWR before applying the
weight distribution spring bars.
5-54
Weight of the Trailering Combination
It is important that the combination of the tow
vehicle and trailer does not exceed any of its weight
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Trailer Weight
Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it is
not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the tow
vehicle and trailer combination, fully loaded for the trip,
getting individual weights for each of these items.
Hitches
The correct hitch equipment helps maintain combination
control. Most small-to-medium trailers can be towed
with a weight carrying hitch which simply features a
coupler latched to the hitch ball. Larger trailers may
require a weight distributing hitch that uses spring bars
to distribute the trailer tongue weight among the two
vehicle and trailer axles. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” earlier in this section for rating limits with
various hitch types.
If a step-bumper hitch will be used, the bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample
room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer
and the bumper.
Consider using sway controls with any trailer. Ask a
trailering professional about sway controls or refer
to the trailer manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions.
Weight‐Distributing Hitch Adjustment
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the
road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. If the
trailer being towed weighs up to 5,000 lbs (2 271 kg)
with a factory-installed step bumper, safety chains
may be attached to the attaching points on the bumper,
otherwise, safety chains should be attached to holes
on the trailer hitch platform. Always leave just enough
slack so the combination can turn. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
A: Body to Ground Distance
B: Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the spring bars
should be adjusted so the distance (A) is the same after
coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle and adjusting the
hitch.
5-55
Tow/Haul Mode
Pressing this button
at the end of the shift
lever turns on and off
the tow/haul mode.
This indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster comes on when
the tow/haul mode is on.
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode on
page 3‑39 for more information.
5-56
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when
the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least
75 percent of the vehicle's Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” earlier in
the section. Tow/Haul is most useful under the following
driving conditions:
.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load through rolling terrain.
.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in stop and go traffic.
.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in busy parking lots where improved low
speed control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded
or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission
driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.
Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
Trailer Brakes
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 2,000 lbs
(900 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they
are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
Since the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak ®, the
trailer brakes cannot tap into the vehicle's hydraulic
system.
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System
The vehicle may have an
Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system for
electric trailer brakes.
This symbol is located on the Trailer Brake Control
Panel on vehicles with an Integrated Trailer Brake
Control System. The power output to the trailer brakes
is based on the amount of brake pressure being applied
by the vehicle’s brake system. This available power
output to the trailer brakes can be adjusted to a wide
range of trailering situations.
The ITBC system is integrated with the vehicle’s brake,
anti‐lock brake and StabiliTrak systems. In trailering
conditions that cause the vehicle’s anti‐lock brake
or StabiliTrak systems to activate, power sent to the
trailer's brakes will be automatically adjusted to
minimize trailer wheel lock-up. This does not imply
that the trailer has the StabiliTrak system.
If the vehicle’s brake, anti‐lock brake or StabiliTrak
systems are not functioning properly, the ITBC system
may not be fully functional or may not function at all.
Make sure all of these systems are fully operational
to ensure full functionality of the ITBC system.
5-57
The ITBC system is powered through the vehicle's
electrical system. Turning the ignition off will also turn
off the ITBC system. The ITBC system is fully functional
only when the ignition is in ON or in RUN.
The ITBC system can only be used with trailers with
electric brakes.
{ WARNING:
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBC system may result in reduced or complete
loss of trailer braking. There may be an increase
in stopping distance or trailer instability which
could result in personal injury or damage to the
vehicle, trailer, or other property. An aftermarket
controller may be available for use with trailers
with surge, air or electric‐over‐hydraulic trailer
brake systems. To determine the type of brakes
on the trailer and the availability of controllers,
check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
5-58
When trailering, make sure of the following:
.
The ITBC system is used only with trailers that are
equipped with electric brakes.
.
All applicable local and federal laws and
regulations are followed.
.
All electrical and mechanical connections to the
trailer are made correctly.
.
The trailer’s brakes are in proper working
condition.
.
The trailer and vehicle are properly loaded for the
towing condition.
The ITBC system is a factory installed item.
Out‐of‐factory installation of this system should
not be attempted. GM is not responsible for warranty or
performance of the system resulting from out‐of‐factory
installation.
Trailer Brake Control Panel
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page
The ITBC system displays messages into the vehicle’s
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑61 for more information.
The display page indicates Trailer Gain setting, power
output to the electric trailer brakes, trailer connection
and system operational status.
The Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed by
performing any of the following actions:
.
Scrolling through the DIC menu pages using the
odometer trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information
button (if equipped).
.
Pressing a Trailer Gain button – If the Trailer Brake
Display Page is not currently displayed, pressing a
Trailer Gain button will first recall the current Trailer
Gain setting. After the Trailer Brake Display Page
is displayed, each press and release of the gain
buttons will then cause the Trailer Gain setting to
change.
.
Activating the Manual Trailer Brake Apply lever
.
Connecting a trailer equipped with electric trailer
brakes
A. Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever
B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons
The ITBC system has a control panel located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column.
See Instrument Panel on page 1‑2. The control panel
allows adjustment to the amount of output, referred to
as trailer gain, available to the electric trailer brakes and
allows manual application the trailer brakes. The Trailer
Brake Control Panel is used along with the Trailer Brake
Display Page on the DIC to adjust and display power
output to the trailer brakes.
5-59
All DIC warning and service messages must first
be acknowledged by the driver by pressing the
odometer trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information
button (if equipped) before the Trailer Brake Display
Page can be displayed and Trailer Gain can be
adjusted.
TRAILER GAIN – This setting is displayed anytime the
Trailer Brake Display Page is active. This setting can be
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected
or disconnected. To adjust the Trailer Gain, press one
of the Trailer Gain adjustment buttons located on the
Trailer Brake Control Panel. Press and hold a gain
button to cause the Trailer Gain to continuously adjust.
To turn the output to the trailer off, adjust the Trailer
Gain setting to 0.0 (zero).
0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default setting. To properly
adjust trailer gain, see the Trailer Gain Adjustment
Procedure later in this section.
5-60
TRAILER OUTPUT – This is displayed any time a trailer
with electric brakes is connected. Output to the electric
brakes is based on the amount of vehicle braking
present and relative to the Trailer Gain setting. Output
is displayed from 0 to 10 bars for each gain setting.
The Trailer Output will indicate “- - - - - -“ on the Trailer
Brake Display Page whenever the following occur:
.
No trailer is connected.
.
A trailer without electric brakes is connected
(no DIC message is displayed).
.
A trailer with electric brakes has become
disconnected (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message will also be displayed on the DIC).
.
There is a fault present in the wiring to the electric
trailer brakes (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message will also be displayed on the DIC).
.
There is a fault in the ITBC system (a SERVICE
TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message will also be
displayed in the DIC).
Manual Trailer Brake Apply
The Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever is located on the
Trailer Brake Control Panel and is used to apply the
trailer’s electric brakes independent of the vehicle’s
brakes. This lever is used in the Trailer Gain Adjustment
Procedure to properly adjust the power output to the
trailer brakes. Sliding the lever to the left will apply only
the trailer brakes. The power output to the trailer is
indicated in the Trailer Brake Display Page in the DIC.
If the vehicle’s service brakes are applied while using
the Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever, the trailer output
power will be the greater of the two.
The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure
Trailer Gain should be set for a specific trailering
condition and must be adjusted any time vehicle
loading, trailer loading or road surface conditions
change.
Setting the Trailer Gain properly is needed for the
best trailer stopping performance. A trailer that is
over-gained may result in locked trailer brakes. A trailer
that is under-gained may result in not enough trailer
braking. Both of these conditions may result in poorer
stopping and stability of the vehicle and trailer.
Use the following procedure to correctly adjust Trailer
Gain for each towing condition:
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in proper working
condition.
2. Connect a properly loaded trailer to the vehicle
and make all necessary mechanical and electrical
connections. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑31 for more information.
3. After the electrical connection is made to a trailer
equipped with electric brakes:
.
A TRAILER CONNECTED message will be
briefly displayed on the DIC display.
.
The Trailer Brake Display Page will appear
on the DIC showing TRAILER GAIN and
TRAILER OUTPUT.
.
In the Trailer Output display on the DIC,
“- - - - - -“ will disappear if there is no error
present. Connecting a trailer without electric
brakes will not clear the six dashed lines.
4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by using the gain
adjustment (+ / -) buttons on the Trailer Brake
Control Panel.
5-61
5. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a
level road surface representative of the towing
condition and free of traffic at about 20 to 25 mph
(32 to 40 km/h) and fully apply the Manual Trailer
Brake Apply lever.
Adjusting trailer gain at speeds lower than
20 to 25 mph (32 to 40 km/h) may result in an
incorrect gain setting.
6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to just below the point of
trailer wheel lock-up, indicated by trailer wheel
squeal or tire smoke when a trailer wheel locks.
Trailer wheel lock-up may not occur if towing a
heavily loaded trailer. In this case, adjust the
Trailer Gain to the highest allowable setting for
the towing condition.
7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any time vehicle loading,
trailer loading or road surface conditions change or
if trailer wheel lock-up is noticed at any time while
towing
Other ITBC Related DIC Messages
In addition to displaying TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER
OUTPUT through the DIC, trailer connection and ITBC
system status is displayed in the DIC.
TRAILER CONNECTED – This message will be
briefly displayed when a trailer with electric brakes
is first connected to the vehicle. This message will
automatically turn off in about ten seconds. The driver
can also acknowledge this message before it
automatically turns off.
CHECK TRAILER WIRING – This message will be
displayed if:
1. The ITBC system first determines connection to
a trailer with electric brakes and then the trailer
harness becomes disconnected from the vehicle.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
stationary, this message will automatically turn off
in about thirty seconds. This message will also turn
off if the driver acknowledges this message off or if
the trailer harness is re-connected.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
moving, this message will continue until the ignition
is turned off. This message will also turn off if the
driver acknowledges this message off or if the
trailer harness is re-connected.
5-62
2. There is an electrical fault in the wiring to the
electric trailer brakes. This message will continue
as long as there is an electrical fault in the trailer
wiring. This message will also turn off if the driver
acknowledges this message off.
To determine if the electrical fault is on the vehicle side
or trailer side of the trailer wiring harness connection,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from the
vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. Wait ten seconds, then turn the ignition back
to RUN.
4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message
re-appears, the electrical fault is on the
vehicle side.
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message only
re-appears when connecting the trailer wiring
harness to the vehicle, the electrical fault is on
the trailer side.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM – This message
will be displayed when there is a problem with the ITBC
system. If this message persists over multiple ignition
cycles there is problem with the ITBC system. Take the
vehicle to an authorized GM dealer to have the ITBC
system diagnosed and repaired.
If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRING or SERVICE
TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message is displayed while
driving the vehicle, power is no longer available to the
trailer brakes. When traffic conditions allow, carefully
pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn
the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the
trailer and turn the ignition back on. If either of these
messages continues, either the vehicle or trailer needs
service.
An authorized GM dealer may be able to diagnose
and repair problems with the trailer. However, any
diagnosis and repair of the trailer is not covered under
the vehicle warranty. Please contact your trailer dealer
for assistance with trailer repairs and trailer warranty
information.
5-63
Driving with a Trailer
{ WARNING:
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect
at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
To maximize safety when towing a trailer:
.
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks
and make necessary repairs before starting
a trip.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. The combination you are driving is
longer and not as responsive as the vehicle itself.
Get acquainted with the handling and braking of the
rig before setting out for the open road.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirrors. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the combination moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the
brakes work.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure and the lamps and any trailer brakes
still work.
Following Distance
.
Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch,
or rear-most window open.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid heavy braking and sudden turns.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
Passing
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑52.
5-64
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
The combination will not accelerate as quickly and is
longer so it is necessary to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before returning to the lane.
Backing Up
Driving On Grades
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand
to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission
is not shifted down, the brakes might get hot and no
longer work well.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn out, the arrows on the
instrument panel will still flash for turns. It is important to
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to
a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
The tow/haul mode may be used if the transmission
shifts too often. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 3‑39.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine
is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar
to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level ground, with the
automatic transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes
before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning
comes on, see Engine Overheating on page 6‑36.
5-65
Parking on Hills
{ WARNING:
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on
a flat surface.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
5. If the vehicle is four-wheel-drive and has a
two-speed transfer case, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear and not in N (Neutral).
6. Release the brake pedal.
5-66
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
If the engine has been left running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move,
even when on fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set.
If the transfer case on a four-wheel-drive vehicle
is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll,
even if the shift lever is in P (Park). Be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
N (Neutral).
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine
3. Shift into a gear
4. Release the parking brake
5. Let up on the brake pedal.
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
7. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See this manual's Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system
and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect these
before and during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Basic Trailer Wiring
The trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pin connector,
is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to the
vehicle's frame. The harness connector can be plugged
into a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer connector
available through your dealer.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
.
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
.
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
.
Brown: Taillamps
.
White: Ground
.
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
.
Red: Battery Feed*
.
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the
underhood electrical center, but the wires are not
connected. They should be connected by your dealer
or a qualified service center.
Trailer Wiring Harness
The vehicle is equipped with the following wiring
harnesses for towing a trailer.
5-67
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness Package
The vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch
platform.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
.
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
.
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
.
Brown: Taillamps
.
White: Ground
.
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
.
Red: Battery Feed*
.
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the
underhood electrical center, but the wires are not
connected. They should be connected by your dealer
or a qualified service center.
If charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, press the
tow/haul mode button located at the end of the shift
lever. This will boost the vehicle system voltage and
properly charge the battery. If the trailer is too light for
tow/haul mode, turn on the headlamps as a second way
to boost the vehicle system and charge the battery.
5-68
Electric Brake Control Wiring
Provisions
These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle as
part of the trailer wiring package. These provisions are
for an electric brake controller. The instrument panel
contains blunt cut wires near the data link connector for
the trailer brake controller. The harness contains the
following wires:
.
Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Trailer Connector
.
Red/Black: Battery
.
Light Blue/White: Brake Switch
.
White: Ground
It should be installed by your dealer or a qualified
service center.
If the vehicle is equipped with an ITBC, the blunt cuts
exist, but are not connected further in the harness. If an
aftermarket trailer brake controller is installed, the ITBC
must be disconnected. Do not power both ITBC and
aftermarket controllers to control the trailer brakes at
the same time.
Trailer Recommendations
Subtract the hitch loads from the Cargo Weight Rating
(CWR). CWR is the maximum weight of the load the
vehicle can carry. It does not include the weight of the
people inside, but you can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg)
for each passenger. The total cargo load must not be
more than the vehicles CWR.
Weigh the vehicle with the trailer attached, so the
GVWR or GAWR are not exceeded. If using a
weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without
the spring bars in place.
The best performance is obtained by correctly
spreading out the weight of the load and choosing
the correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information see Towing a Trailer on
page 5‑49.
5-69
2 NOTES
5-70
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Automatic Transmission Fluid (4-Speed
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Fan Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27
6-30
6-32
6-36
6-39
6-39
6-40
6-41
6-42
6-45
6-46
6-51
6-52
6-53
6-55
6-58
6-58
6-58
6-60
6-60
6-61
6-1
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Tire Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Different Size Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Secondary Latch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . 6-103
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
6-2
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades . . . .
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-108
6-108
6-109
6-110
6-111
6-111
6-111
6-112
6-112
6-113
6-114
6-114
6-115
6-115
6-116
6-116
6-116
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-117
6-117
6-117
6-118
6-118
6-118
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . .
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . .
Underhood Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-118
6-118
6-119
6-121
6-122
6-126
6-3
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer. You will
receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories are added
to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance
and safety, including such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability
control. Some of these accessories could even
cause malfunction or damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM
Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer and ask
for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑100.
6-4
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many
fluids, and some component wear by-products contain
and/or emit these chemicals.
If this vehicle is a Two‐mode Hybrid, see the Two‐mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
{ WARNING:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8‑16.
6-5
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑99.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Record on page 7‑15.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect
the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and
can affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
ensure gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list of marketers
providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be
found at www.toptiergas.com.
6-6
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle's engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 6‑117.
If the vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 0),
the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), the 6.0L V8 engine
(VIN Code J), or the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2),
you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 6‑9. In all other engines,
use only unleaded gasoline. See Gasoline Octane on
page 6‑7.
Gasoline Octane
For all vehicles except those with the 6.2L V8 engine
(VIN Code 2), use regular unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane
rating is less than 87, an audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark knock, might be heard
when driving. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If heavy
knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine needs service.
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2), use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle's
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and a slight
audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard. If the octane is less than 87, you
might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could
damage the engine. If heavy knocking is heard when
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines containing
MMT. See Additives on page 6‑8 for additional
information.
6-7
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, the vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could
turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑39. If this
occurs, return to your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
6-8
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS
is the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit‐related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be
available in your area. We recommend that you use
these gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer for service.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle's engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 6‑117.
If the vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0), the
5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), the 6.0L V8 engine
(VIN Code J), or the 6.2L V8 engine (Code 2), you can
use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing
up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel on page 6‑6.
In all other engines, use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Gasoline Octane on page 6‑7.
Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0),
the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), the 6.0L V8 engine
(VIN Code J), or the 6.2L V8 engine (Code 2) can use
85% ethanol fuel (E85). We encourage the use of
E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. The ethanol
in E85 is a “renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from
renewable sources such as corn and other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel
(E85) pump available. The U.S. Department of Energy
has an alternative fuels website (www.eere.energy.gov/
afdc/infrastructure/locator.html) that can help you find
E85 fuel. Those stations that do have E85 should have
a label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if
the ethanol content is greater than 85%.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification
D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85
will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet
ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
6-9
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is
not properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank
can improve starting. For good starting and heater
efficiency below 0°C (32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
should contain no more than 70% ethanol. It is best
not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85.
If you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you add
as much fuel as possible — do not add less than 11 L
(three gallons) when refueling. You should drive the
vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 11 km
(seven miles) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the
change in ethanol concentration.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you
will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using
E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the
Tank on page 6‑11.
6-10
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with E85
fuel and can harm the vehicle's fuel system. Do not
add anything to E85. Damage caused by additives
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,
or contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
Filling the Tank
{ WARNING:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle. If the vehicle has
E85 fuel capability, the fuel cap will be yellow and state
that E85 or gasoline can be used. See Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 6‑9.
6-11
{ WARNING:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in
and release and it will open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released too
soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
6-12
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6‑112.
When replacing the fuel cap, insert the tether in its hole
before tightening the cap. Turn the fuel cap clockwise
until it clicks. It will require more effort to turn the fuel
cap on the last turn as you tighten it. Make sure the cap
is fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine
if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑39.
If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), the
TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays if the fuel cap is
not properly installed.
{ WARNING:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 4‑39.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{ WARNING:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
.
Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling is
complete.
.
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
.
Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
6-13
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ WARNING:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
6-14
Hood Release
To open the hood:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle to the lower left
of the steering wheel.
3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then bring the hood from full
open to within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed
position, pause, then push the front center of
the hood with a swift, firm motion to fully close
the hood.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate
the secondary hood release, near the center
of the grille.
6-15
Engine Compartment Overview
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.
When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine (6.0L and 6.2L similar), here is what you will see:
6-16
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑22.
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
See Cooling System on page 6‑30.
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 6‑46.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 6‑18.
I. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 6‑30.
D. Battery on page 6‑45.
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 6‑40.
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑18.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 6‑42.
F. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission
Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on page 6‑24
or Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed
Transmission) on page 6‑27.
L. Underhood Fuse Block on page 6‑122.
M. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 6‑41.
G. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Out of View).
See Jump Starting on page 6‑46.
6-17
Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
6-18
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of
oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑126.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑16
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
Cold Temperature Operation
SAE 5W-30
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine Oil
to Use” for more information.
Look for three things:
.
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst
symbol
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
.
.
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
6-19
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
6-20
On some vehicles, when the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished, a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message comes on to indicate that an oil
change is necessary. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4‑61. Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 1 000 km (600 miles). It is possible that,
if driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
might not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, the engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. For vehicles without the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message, an oil change
is needed when the OIL LIFE REMAINING percentage
is near 0%. Your dealer has trained service people who
will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must
be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) since the last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it
can calculate when the next oil change is required.
If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to
a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message coming on,
reset the system.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine Oil
Life System on most vehicles:
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
vehicle must be in P (Park) to access this display.
See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑48 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4‑55.
On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life System can be reset
as follows:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within five seconds.
3. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
If the display shows 100%, the system is reset.
See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑48 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4‑55.
If the vehicle has a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message and it comes back on when the vehicle is
started and/or the OIL LIFE REMAINING is near 0%,
the Engine Oil Life System has not reset. Repeat the
procedure.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC,
or the trip odometer reset stem if the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, for more than five seconds.
The oil life will change to 100%.
6-21
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine
air cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1
through 6. When the engine air cleaner/filter is
removed, lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt.
If the engine air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
1. Locate the air cleaner/
filter assembly.
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑16.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3 for more information.
If driving on dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
6-22
2. Loosen the four screws on the cover of the
housing and lift up the cover.
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces
and the housing.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
{ WARNING:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not drive with the
air cleaner/filter off.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as little
dirt as possible.
6-23
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(4-Speed Transmission)
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealer service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if checking the
transmission fluid.
6-24
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
.
When outside temperatures are above
32°C (90°F).
.
At high speed for quite a while.
.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 82°C to 93°C
(180°F to 200°F).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
24 km (15 miles) when outside temperatures are above
10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C (50°F), drive the
vehicle in 3 (Third) until the engine temperature gauge
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
10°C (50°F) or more. If it is colder than 10°C (50°F),
you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will
give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare the vehicle as follows:
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the
shift lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes
or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these
steps:
1. Locate the
transmission
dipstick handle
with this graphic
which is located at
the rear of the engine
compartment, on the
passenger side of the
vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16
for more information on location.
2. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-25
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD
area, below the cross-hatched area, for a cold
check or in the HOT or cross-hatched area for a
hot check. Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed
down to get an accurate reading.
5. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using
the procedure described previously. Consistency
(repeatable readings) is important to maintaining proper
fluid level. If readings are still inconsistent, contact your
dealer.
6-26
Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick
tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is
hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the fluid
level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring
the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It does not
take much fluid, generally less than 0.5 Liter (1 Pint).
Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
.
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(6-Speed Transmission)
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if checking the
transmission fluid.
It is usually not necessary to check the transmission
fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a
transmission leak or overheating the transmission.
If you suspect a small leak, then use the following
checking procedures to check the fluid level. However,
if there is a large leak, then it may be necessary to have
the vehicle towed to a dealer service department and
have it repaired before driving the vehicle further.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the
Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3. Be sure to use the transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11.
Before checking the fluid level, prepare the vehicle as
follows:
1. Start the engine and park the vehicle on a level
surface. Keep the engine running.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in
P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, move the shift
lever back to P (Park).
6-27
4. Allow the engine to idle (500 – 800 rpm) for at least
one minute. Slowly release the brake pedal.
5. Keep the engine running and press the
Trip/Fuel button or trip odometer reset stem
until TRANS TEMP (Transmission Temperature)
displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determine and
perform the appropriate check procedure. If the
TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required
temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool,
or operate the vehicle until the appropriate
transmission fluid temperature is reached.
Cold Check Procedure
Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if
the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely
until a hot check procedure can be made. The hot
check procedure is the most accurate method to check
the fluid level. Perform the hot check procedure at the
6-28
first opportunity. Use this cold check procedure to
check fluid level when the transmission temperature
is between 27°C and 32°C (80°F and 90°F).
1. Locate the
transmission dipstick at
the rear of the engine
compartment, on the
passenger side of the
vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16
for more information.
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
reading.
Hot Check Procedure
Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level
when the transmission fluid temperature is between
71°C and 93°C (160°F and 200°F).
The hot check is the most accurate method to check
the fluid level. The hot check should be performed at
the first opportunity in order to verify the cold check.
The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases,
so it is important to ensure the transmission
temperature is within range.
5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check band,
add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the
level into the COLD band. It does not take much
fluid, generally less than 0.5 Liter (1 Pint). Do not
overfill.
6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity
after the transmission reaches a normal
operating temperature between 71°C to 93°C
(160°F to 200°F).
7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
1. Locate the
transmission dipstick at
the rear of the engine
compartment, on the
passenger side of the
vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16
for more information.
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
reading.
6-29
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using
the procedure described previously. Consistency
(repeatable readings) is important to maintaining proper
fluid level. If readings are still inconsistent, contact your
dealer.
Cooling System
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
5. Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch
band on the dipstick. If the fluid level is not within
the HOT band, and the transmission temperature
is between 71°C and 93°C (160°F and 200°F), add
or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into
the HOT band. If the fluid level is low, add only
enough fluid to bring the level into the HOT band.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
0.5 Liter (1 Pint). Do not overfill.
6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
6-30
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
{ WARNING:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
5.3L Engine shown, 6.0L and 6.2L Engine similar
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
the vehicle.
{ WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
6-31
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how
to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 6‑36.
What to Use
{ WARNING:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. The vehicle's coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
6-32
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
.
Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
.
Protects against rust and corrosion.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
.
Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11 for more information.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or
above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before this is done.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16
for more information on location.
The coolant level should be at or above the
FULL COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a
leak in the cooling system.
6-33
How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank
{ WARNING:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
{ WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
6-34
{ WARNING:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when
the cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
to the FULL COLD mark.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and
remove it.
6-35
5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the
coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill
procedure Steps 1 through 6.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge
tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
6-36
There is a coolant temperature gauge on your vehicle's
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge on page 4‑38.
In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and a ENGINE
POWER IS REDUCED message comes on in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) on the instrument panel.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑61.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the
engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by the vehicle
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode for information on driving to
a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 6‑39 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
{ WARNING:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there
is no sign of steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 6‑39 for information on driving to
a safe place in an emergency.
6-37
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message, along
with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious
problem.
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
.
Tows a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 5‑49.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
6-38
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gauge is no longer in
the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” later in this section.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message is displayed,
an overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑18.
Engine Fan Noise
If the vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan, when
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is
not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and
reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases as the clutch more fully engages, so you may
hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should
not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling
is not required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
If the vehicle has electric cooling fans, you may hear
the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday
driving. The fans may turn off if no cooling is required.
Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high
outside temperatures, or if you are operating the air
conditioning system, the fans may change to high
speed and you may hear an increase in fan noise.
This is normal and indicates that the cooling system is
functioning properly. The fans will change to low speed
when additional cooling is no longer required.
6-39
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
To check the power steering fluid:
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑16
for reservoir location.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
Always use the proper fluid.
6-40
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be
sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use.
Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing
in an area where the temperature may fall below
freezing.
Notice:
.
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer's instructions for
adding water.
.
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage the washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system. Also, water does
not clean as well as washer fluid.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
.
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
the windshield washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer system and
paint.
Adding Washer Fluid
The vehicle has a low washer fluid message in
the DIC that comes on when the washer fluid is low.
The message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of
each ignition cycle. When the WASHER FLUID LOW
ADD FLUID message displays, you will need to add
washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑16 for
reservoir location.
6-41
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑16
for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
.
The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
.
A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or
later the brakes will not work well.
6-42
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
{ WARNING:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on
the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and the vehicle
could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑36.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3.
Checking Brake Fluid
Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16.
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not,
have the brake hydraulic
system checked to see if
there is a leak.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
{ WARNING:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
.
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake hydraulic system parts. For example,
just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake hydraulic system
can damage brake hydraulic system parts
so badly that they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of
fluid.
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑112.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed
container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11.
6-43
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new
pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is moving, except when
applying the brake pedal firmly.
{ WARNING:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake wear warning sound
is heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
6-44
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts
in the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑126.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign that brake service might
be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every brake stop, the disc brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change
in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake
parts are installed.
Battery
If the vehicle is a Two‐mode Hybrid, see the Two‐mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Refer to the replacement number on the original battery
label when a new battery is needed. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6‑16 for battery
location.
{ DANGER:
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
{ WARNING:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 6‑46
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
6-45
Jump Starting
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
If the vehicle's battery (or batteries) has run down,
you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following
steps to do it safely.
{ WARNING:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
.
They contain acid that can burn you.
.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
6-46
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by
the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle's system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you do not want. You would
not be able to start your vehicle, and the bad
grounding could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put the automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
If the vehicle has a four-wheel-drive transfer case
with a N (Neutral) position, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear, not in N (Neutral).
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets.
Turn off the radio and all the lamps that are not
needed. This avoids sparks and helps save both
batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (−) jump starting
terminal. You should always use these remote
terminals instead of the terminals on the battery.
If the vehicle has a remote positive (+) terminal, it
is located under a red plastic cover at the positive
battery post. To uncover the remote positive (+)
terminal, open the red plastic cover.
The remote negative (−) terminal is a stud located
on the right front of the engine, where the negative
battery cable attaches.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16
for more information on the location of the remote
positive (+) and remote negative (−) terminals.
6-47
{ WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
{ WARNING:
Using an open flame near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
(Continued)
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
{ WARNING:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
6-48
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to
the positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the remote negative (−) terminal, on the vehicle
with the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
6-49
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do not
touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the bad battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover, if the
vehicle has one, to its original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
6-50
Rear Axle
How to Check Lubricant
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during
production. They are not filled to reach a certain level.
When checking the fluid level on any axle, variations in
the readings can be caused by factory fill differences
between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume.
Also, if a vehicle has just been driven before checking
the fluid level, it may appear lower than normal because
fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not
drained back to the sump area. Therefore, a reading
taken five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will
appear to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that
has been stationary for an hour or two. Remember that
the rear axle assembly must be supported to get a true
reading.
1500 Series
6-51
.
For all 6.0L 1500 series and all 6.2L non‐all wheel
drive 1500 series luxury model applications, the
proper level is from 0.6 inch to 1.6 inches (15 mm
to 40 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to
reach the proper level.
.
The proper fill level for the 2500 series is from 0 to
1/2 inch (0 to 13 mm) below the bottom of the filler
plug hole, located at the front of the axle. Add only
enough fluid to reach the proper level.
Four-Wheel Drive
2500 Series
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
.
6-52
For all 4.8L, 5.3L 1500 series and all 6.2L all wheel
drive 1500 series luxury model applications , the
proper level is from 0.04 inch to 0.75 inch (1.0 mm
to 19.0 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to
reach the proper level.
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. There are two additional systems that need
lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak, or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
When to Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑11.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Active Transfer Case
A. Fill Plug
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
B. Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the fill plug hole, you
will need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the fill plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
6-53
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
All except 1500 Series
A: Fill Plug
B: Drain Plug
1500 Series
.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level from 0 (0 mm) to 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole.
.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
A: Fill Plug
B: Drain Plug
6-54
What to Use
The vehicle should:
.
Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall.
.
Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.
.
Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim of the headlamps have been preset at
the factory and should need no further adjustment.
.
Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
.
Be fully assembled and all other work stopped
while headlamp aiming is being performed.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the aim
of the headlamps may be affected and adjustment may
be necessary.
.
Normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
.
Have the tires properly inflated.
.
Have the spare tire is in its proper location in the
vehicle.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑11.
Headlamp Aiming
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs to
be adjusted.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer for service if the headlamps need to be adjusted.
It is possible however, to re-aim the headlamps as
described.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle's low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
6-55
To adjust the vertical aim:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6‑14
4. At a wall, measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall the
width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in
Step 4.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low‐beam
headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot
on the low‐beam headlamp.
6-56
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted to
be seen on the flat surface.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with an
E8 Torx® socket.
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the
correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B)
shows the incorrect headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
6-57
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 6‑60.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the
Two-mode Hybrid supplement for the bulb changing
procedure.
A. Taillamp/Turn
Signal Lamp
B. Back-up Lamp
{ WARNING:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
6-58
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the liftgate. See Power Liftgate on
page 3‑15.
2. Remove the two
screws from the
taillamp assembly.
4. Press the release tab, if bulb socket has one, and
turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket.
6. Press a new bulb into the bulb socket and insert it
into the taillamp assembly. Turn the bulb socket
clockwise into the taillamp assembly until it clicks.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly. When reinstalling,
make sure to line up the pins on the taillamp
assembly with the vehicle. If you do not do this,
you will not be able correctly install the taillamp
assembly.
3. Pull the taillamp assembly rearward until you
disengage the inner pins on the taillamp assembly
from the vehicle.
6-59
License Plate Lamp
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.
Replacement Bulbs
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the
Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
License Plate Lamp
Rear Turn Signal Lamp, Taillamp, and
Stoplamp
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the
license plate lamps to the molding that is part of
the liftgate.
2. Twist and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the molding opening.
6-60
Bulb Number
7441
168
3057KX
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. To replace the wiper blade
assembly:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 7‑13.
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the
blade, and turn the blade assembly away from the
arm connector.
6-61
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the
park rest position.
4. Replace the wiper blade.
5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest
position.
2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the
backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not lock
in a vertical position, so care should be used when
pulling it away from the vehicle.
3. Turn the wiper blade assembly, and pull it off of the
wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm in position and push
the blade away from the wiper arm.
6-62
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and
where to obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer.
WARNING: (Continued)
should be checked when your vehicle's
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑72.
.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire's tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle's tires have been damaged,
replace them.
{ WARNING:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
.
.
Overloading your vehicle's tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑31.
Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
20‐Inch Tires
If your vehicle has the optional 20‐inch
P275/55R20 size tires, they are classified
as touring tires and are designed for on road
use. The low‐profile, wide tread design is not
recommended for off‐road driving. See Off-Road
Driving on page 5‑12, for additional information.
(Continued)
6-63
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples
of a typical P‐Metric and a LT‐Metric tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation) :
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
6-64
(E) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) : Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based
on three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information,
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑82.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit :
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑72 and
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
6-65
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑72 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation) : The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
6-66
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a
single. For information on recommended tire
pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑72
and Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit number that
indicates the tire height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the tire illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is 75 percent as high
as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load.
6-67
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire
(A) Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system.
The letters LT as the first two characters in the
tire size means a light truck tire engineered
to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit number that
indicates the tire height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT‐Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
6-68
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Load Range : Load Range.
(G) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load index and speed rating of a tire.
If two numbers are given as in the example,
120/116, then this represents the load index for
single versus dual wheel usage (single/dual).
The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire
is certified to carry a load.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑72.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and
date of production.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to
its width.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31.
6-69
Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
6-70
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑31.
Occupant Distribution : Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure : Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑72
and Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6‑79.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire's
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑82.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑31.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle's capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑31.
6-71
Inflation - Tire Pressure
If your vehicle is a Two‐mode Hybrid, see the
Two‐mode Hybrid manual for more information.
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under‐inflation or over‐inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under‐inflation), you can get the following:
.
Too much flexing
.
Too much heat
.
Tire overloading
.
Premature or irregular wear
.
Poor handling
.
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over‐inflation),
you can get the following:
.
Unusual wear
.
Poor handling
.
Rough ride
.
Needless damage from road hazards
6-72
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle's original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
tire. SeeSpare Tire on page 6‑107 for additional
information.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even
when they are underinflated. Check the tire's
inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle's tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get
a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low,
add air until you reach the recommended amount.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under‐inflated.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
6-73
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under‐inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under‐inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start‐ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
6-74
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑75 for
additional information.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
If your vehicle is a Two‐mode Hybrid, see the
Two‐mode Hybrid manual for more information.
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle's tires and
transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located
in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and
the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be
viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC
Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑48 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑55 and DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑61.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator
that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle's original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle's tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑31, for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your
vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑72.
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑78 and Tires on page 6‑63.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
6-75
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
.
.
6-76
One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re‐install the
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching
Process” later in this section.
.
One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer for service.
.
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle's original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 6‑80.
.
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer for service if the
TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle's tires or replace one
or more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in
the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side
front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer for
service.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire's
air pressure. If increasing the tire's air pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire's sidewall.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gauge, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions
the matching process stops and you need to start over.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press Q and K on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds
twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on
the DIC screen.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that
the sensor identification code has been matched to
this tire and wheel position.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
6-77
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active. The
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6‑79 and Wheel Replacement on page 6‑85.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle's tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 6‑79 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
6-78
When rotating your vehicle's tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑72 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑31.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6‑75.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑126.
{ WARNING:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑88.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have only
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less
of tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires
may not have treadwear
indicators.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or
Spare Tire and Tools on page 6‑103.
6-79
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
.
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire's rubber.
.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how
fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically
wear out before they degrade due to age. If you are
unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
6-80
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and
tire pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all‐season tread design, the
TPC spec number will be followed by an MS for mud
and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 6‑64
for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep
your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires
were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
vehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑78
for information on proper tire rotation.
{ WARNING:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes, brands,
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle
might not handle properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different sizes, brands,
or types could also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size, brand, and type
tires on all wheels.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare than
the road tires (those originally installed on your
vehicle). When new, your vehicle included a spare
tire and wheel assembly with a similar overall
diameter as your vehicle's road tires and wheels,
so it is all right to drive on it. Because this spare
was developed for use on your vehicle, it will not
affect vehicle handling.
{ WARNING:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks
after many miles of driving. A tire and/or
wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on
the vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle's tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias‐belted tires)
as your vehicle's original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
may give an inaccurate low‐pressure warning if
non‐TPC spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may give a low‐pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑73.
Your vehicle's original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑31, for more information about the
Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on
your vehicle.
6-81
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as anti‐lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
{ WARNING:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not recommended
for those wheels are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and have
them properly installed by a GM certified
technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 6‑80 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6‑4 for additional
information.
6-82
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal
Safety Requirements In Addition To These
Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1½) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
6-83
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments
to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be
necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice
unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side
or the other, the alignment might need to be checked.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
6-84
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
{ WARNING:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑88 for more
information.
6-85
Used Replacement Wheels
{ WARNING:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
If your vehicle is a Two‐mode Hybrid, see the
Two‐mode Hybrid manual for more information.
{ WARNING:
If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or P275/55R20
size tires, do not use tire chains. They can
damage your vehicle because there is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
(Continued)
6-86
WARNING: (Continued)
damage to the brakes, suspension, or other
vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle and you or others may be injured in a
crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer's
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle's wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has P265/70R17 size tires,
use tire chains only where legal and only when you
must. Use chains that are the proper size for your
vehicle's tires. Install them on the rear tires only.
Do not use chains on the front tires.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer's instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle's tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{ WARNING:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it
for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
6-87
Changing a Flat Tire
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the
Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3.
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle with a
N (Neutral) transfer case position, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
N (Neutral).
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
{ WARNING:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
(Continued)
6-88
WARNING: (Continued)
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
6. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks (A).
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need to change a flat tire is
stored under the storage tray, which is located on the
driver side trim panel (over the rear wheelhouse).
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
Regular Wheelbase shown, Extended Wheelbase
similar
1. Remove the tray to access the tools by pulling up
on the finger depression under the jack symbol.
6-89
The tools you will be using include the following:
2. Remove the wing nut (B) used to retain the tool
bag by turning it counterclockwise.
A. Jack
D. Jack Handle Extensions
3. Turn the knob (A) on the jack counterclockwise
to release the jack and wheel blocks from the
bracket.
B. Wheel Blocks
E. Wheel Wrench
C. Jack Handle
4. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel
block retainer by turning the wing nut (C)
counterclockwise.
6-90
To access the spare tire, refer to the following graphics
and instructions:
H. Spare Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Down)
I. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
J. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
K. Spare Tire Lock
1. Open the hoist shaft access door (C) on the
bumper to access the spare tire lock (K).
2. To remove the spare tire lock, insert the ignition
key, turn it clockwise and then pull it straight out.
A. Hoist Assembly
E. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist Cable
C. Hoist Shaft Access
Cover/Hole
G. Tire/Wheel
Retainer
3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D) and
wheel wrench (E) as shown.
D. Jack Handle
Extensions
6-91
4. Insert the open end
of the extension (J)
through the hole in the
rear bumper (I) (hoist
shaft access hole).
Be sure the hoist end (J) of the extension (D)
connects to the hoist shaft (B). The ribbed square
end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire.
6-92
5. Turn the wheel wrench (E) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire (H) to the ground. Continue to
turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to
lower. See Secondary Latch System on page 6‑100
for more information.
6. Use the wheel wrench
hook that allows you
to pull the hoist cable
towards you, to assist
in reaching the
spare tire.
Once the retainer is separated from the guide pin,
tilt the retainer and pull it through the center of the
wheel along with the cable and latch.
7. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack
in the cable to access the tire/wheel retainer.
Separate the retainer from the guide pin by sliding
the retainer up the pin while pressing down on the
latch.
8. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
6-93
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑88
for more information.
2. If your vehicle has a center cap that covers the
wheel fasteners, place the chisel end of the wheel
wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry the
cap out.
6-94
If the wheel has a bolt-on hub cap, loosen the
plastic nut caps by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. The plastic nut caps will be
retained in the hub cap after it is removed from
the wheel.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.
Jacking Locations (Overall View)
A. Front Position
B. Rear Position
Front Position – 1500 Models
4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.
6-95
Front Position – 2500 Models
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of
the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle
and only one jack handle extension. Attach the
wheel wrench to the jack handle extension. Attach
the jack handle to the jack (A). Position the jack
on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame
sections overlap. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise
to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough
off the ground so there is enough room for the
spare tire to clear the ground.
6-96
Rear Position – 1500 Models
{ WARNING:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ WARNING:
Rear Position – All Other Models
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire
of the vehicle, you will need to use the jack
handle (B) and both jack handle extensions (C).
Attach the wheel wrench (D) to the jack handle
extensions (C). Attach the jack handle (B) to the
jack (A). Use the jacking pad provided on the rear
axle. Turn the wheel wrench (D) clockwise to raise
the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare tire
to clear the ground.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
6-97
5. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
{ WARNING:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or
a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6‑88.
6. Take off the flat tire.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces,
and spare wheel.
8. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the
spare tire.
{ WARNING:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
6-98
9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel is
held against the hub.
WARNING: (Continued)
10. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking
wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑126 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
11. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as
shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten
the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑126 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
{ WARNING:
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall either the center cap or the bolt-on hub
cap, depending on which your vehicle has.
.
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
(Continued)
For center caps, line up the tab on the center cap
with the slot in the wheel. The cap only goes in
one way. Place the cap on the wheel and press
until it snaps into place.
6-99
.
For bolt-on hub caps, line up the plastic nut caps
with the wheel nuts and tighten clockwise by hand
to get them started. Then tighten with the wheel
wrench until snug.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the
spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
down. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on
page 6‑103.
{ WARNING:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed next.
6-100
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end is visible.
If the cable is not
visible proceed to
Step 6.
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on
page 6‑89.
7. Place the bottom
edge of the jack (A) on
the wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that
the jack is balanced
securely.
5. If the spare does not lower, turn the wrench
counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches
(15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with
the backs facing each other.
6-101
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the
rear bumper.
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the
center of the spare tire.
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire
stops moving upward and is held firmly in place.
The secondary latch has released and the spare
tire is balancing on the jack.
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
6-102
{ WARNING:
Someone standing too close during the procedure
could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does
not slide off the jack completely, make sure no
one is behind you or on either side of you as you
pull the jack out from under the spare.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert
the hoist end of extension, and wheel wrench into
the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the
wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare
the rest of the way.
14. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the
bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the
cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been inspected and/or
replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 6‑94.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{ WARNING:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time
or with the valve stem pointing up can damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired as
soon as possible.
6-103
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier. Refer to the following graphics and
instructions to help you:
G. Tire/Wheel Retainer
H. Spare Tire/Flat Tire
(Valve Stem Pointed Down)
J. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
K. Spare Tire Lock
I. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
1. Put the tire (H) on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem pointed down, and to
the rear.
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Hoist Shaft Access
Cover/Hole
D. Jack Handle
Extensions
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Hoist Cable
2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle. Separate the tire/
wheel retainer (G) from the guide pin. Pull the pin
through the center of the wheel. Tilt the retainer
down through the center wheel opening.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the
underside of the wheel.
6-104
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until
you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot
overtighten the cable.
3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D) and
wheel wrench (E) as shown.
4. Insert the open end
of the extension (J)
through the hole in the
rear bumper (I) (hoist
shaft access hole).
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,
pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire
moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.
9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover.
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
6-105
To store the tools, do the following:
3. Position the jack (E) and wheel blocks (A) in the
driver's side trim panel over the wheelhouse.
4. Turn the jack knob (G) clockwise until the jack is
secured tight in the mounting bracket. Be sure to
position the holes in the base of the jack onto the
pin in the mounting bracket.
5. Use the retaining bracket (C) to fasten the tool
bag (B) on the stud and turn the wing nut (D)
clockwise to secure.
A. Wheel Blocks
E. Jack
B. Tool Bag with
Jack Tools
F. Wing Nut Retaining
Wheel Blocks
C. Retaining Bracket
G. Jack Knob
D. Wing Nut Retaining
Tool Bag
1. Return the tools (wheel wrench, jack handle, and
jack handle extensions) to the tool bag (B).
2. Assemble wheel blocks (A) and jack (E) together
with the wing nut (F).
6-106
6. Return the storage tray to its original stored
position.
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation
pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑72 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31 for
information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire on page 6‑94 and Storing a
Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 6‑103.
Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle,
do not drive in four-wheel drive until you can have
your flat tire repaired and/or replaced. You could
damage the vehicle, and the repair costs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never use four-wheel
drive when the different size spare tire is installed
on the vehicle.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tires originally installed on your vehicle. This
spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle, so it
is all right to drive on it. If your vehicle has four-wheel
drive and the different size spare tire is installed, keep
the vehicle in two-wheel drive.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road tire
repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed
back onto your vehicle. This way, the spare tire will be
available in case you need it again.
Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because
they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel
together. If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not
match your vehicle's original road tires and wheels
in size and type, do not include the spare in the tire
rotation.
6-107
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle's interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust
and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove
particles from the upholstery. It is important to keep
the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily
soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
The vehicle's interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle's interior.
When cleaning the vehicle's interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
6-108
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle's breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning the vehicle's
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the
vehicle's doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle's
upholstery and clean the vehicle's glass can be
obtained from your dealer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
.
A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
.
A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
.
Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
.
Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
.
Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
.
Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle's interior.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any
soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the
soil as possible using one of the following techniques:
.
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper
towel until no more can be removed.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
6-109
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that
was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
6-110
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of the leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle's interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they
can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11.
6-111
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle's finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on
the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not
be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer. Follow all manufacturers' directions
regarding correct product usage, necessary safety
precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle
care product.
6-112
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑112.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are
marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal parts.
6-113
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with
glass cleaner.
The vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when you
clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup
of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn
or damaged.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
.
Heat and sun
.
Snow and ice, without proper removal
6-114
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim
may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such
as ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle's chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because they could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive a
vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on
the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
6-115
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer's/retailer's body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
6-116
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑126 for
the vehicle's engine code.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove box, has the
following information:
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside. The VIN also
appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts
labels and certificates of title and registration.
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
.
Model designation
.
Paint information
.
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
6-117
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and
the damage would not be covered by the vehicle's
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑99 and
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑100.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due
to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
6-118
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. If the current load is too heavy, the
circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool down
period, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don't
have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has
the same amperage. Just pick some feature of your
vehicle that you can get along without – like the
radio or cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the
correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse
block access door is
located on the driver side
edge of the instrument
panel.
Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.
The vehicle may not use all of the fuses shown.
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Usage
Rear Seats
Rear Accessory Power Outlet
Steering Wheel Controls Backlight
Driver Door Module
Dome Lamps, Driver Side Turn Signal
Driver Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp
Instrument Panel Back Lighting
Passenger Side Turn Signal,
Stoplamp
6-119
Fuses
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
6-120
Usage
Passenger Door Module, Driver
Unlock
Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature)
Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature)
Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted
Stoplamp
Rear Climate Controls
Power Mirror
Body Control Module (BCM)
Accessory Power Outlets
Interior Lamps
Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature)
Rear Seat Entertainment
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist,
Power Liftgate
Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature)
Fuses
22
23
24
25
26
Circuit Breaker
LT DR
Harness
Connector
LT DR
BODY
BODY
Usage
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Rear Wiper
Cooled Seats
Driver Seat Module, Remote Keyless
Entry System
Driver Power Door Lock
(Unlock Feature)
Usage
Driver Side Power Window Circuit
Breaker
Usage
Driver Door Harness Connection
Harness Connector
Harness Connector
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The center instrument panel fuse block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
Top View
Harness
Connector
HEADLINER 3
HEADLINER 2
HEADLINER 1
SEO/UPFITTER
Circuit Breaker
Harness
Connector
BODY 2
BODY 1
BODY 3
Usage
Headliner Harness Connector 3
Headliner Harness Connector 2
Headliner Harness Connector 1
Special Equipment Option Upfitter
Harness Connector
Usage
CB1
Passenger Side Power Window
Circuit Breaker
CB2
Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker
CB3
Driver Seat Circuit Breaker
CB4
Rear Sliding Window
Usage
Body Harness Connector 2
Body Harness Connector 1
Body Harness Connector 3
6-121
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
6-122
Fuses
1
Usage
Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
2
Electronic Stability Suspension
Control, Automatic Level Control
Exhaust
3
Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
4
Engine Controls
Fuses
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Usage
Engine Control Module,
Throttle Control
Trailer Brake Controller
Front Washer
Oxygen Sensors
Antilock Brakes System 2
Trailer Back-up Lamps
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Engine Control Module (Battery)
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Right Side)
Transmission Control Module
(Battery)
Vehicle Back-up Lamps
Passenger Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Air Conditioning Compressor
Oxygen Sensors
Fuses
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Usage
Transmission Controls (Ignition)
Fuel Pump
Fuel System Control Module
Headlamp Washer
Rear Windshield Washer
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Left Side)
Trailer Park Lamps
Driver Side Park Lamps
Passenger Side Park Lamps
Fog Lamps
Horn
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
Daytime Running Lamps 2
6-123
Fuses
34
6-124
Usage
Sunroof
35
Key Ignition System, Theft Deterrent
System
36
Windshield Wiper
37
38
Fuses
47
48
Usage
Not Used
Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition)
49
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
50
Rear Defogger
Electric Adjustable Pedals
51
Heated Mirrors
39
Climate Controls (Battery)
52
SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
40
Airbag System (Ignition)
41
Amplifier
53
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power
Outlet
42
Audio System
54
43
Miscellaneous (Ignition),
Cruise Control
Automatic Level Control Compressor
Relay
55
Climate Controls (Ignition)
44
Liftgate Release
56
45
Airbag System (Battery)
Engine Control Module, Secondary
Fuel Pump (Ignition)
46
Instrument Panel Cluster
J-Case Fuses
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
Automatic Level Control Compressor
Heavy Duty Antilock Braking System
Cooling Fan 2
Antilock Brake System 1
Starter
Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes)
Left Bussed Electrical Center 1
Electric Running Boards
Heated Windshield Washer System
Transfer Case
68
Stud 1 (Trailer Connector Battery
Power)
69
Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1
70
Climate Control Blower
71
Power Liftgate Module
72
Left Bussed Electrical Center 2
Relays
FAN HI
FAN LO
FAN CNTRL
HDLP LO/HID
FOG LAMP
A/C CMPRSR
STRTR
PWR/TRN
FUEL PMP
PRK LAMP
REAR DEFOG
RUN/CRANK
Usage
Cooling Fan High Speed
Cooling Fan Low Speed
Cooling Fan Control
Low-Beam Headlamp
Front Fog Lamps
Air Conditioning Compressor
Starter
Powertrain
Fuel Pump
Parking Lamps
Rear Defogger
Switched Power
6-125
Capacities and Specifications
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑11 for more information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
5.3L V8
18.3 qt
17.3 L
6.0L V8 1500 Series
17.9 qt
16.9 L
6.0L V8 2500 Series
17.4 qt
16.5 L
6.2L V8
17.6 qt
16.7 L
6.0 qt†
5.7 L†
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Regular
26.0 gal
98.4 L
Extended 1500 Series
31.5 gal
119.2 L
Extended 2500 Series
39.0 gal
147.6 L
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
6L80-E Transmission
6.0 qt
5.7 L
6L90-E Transmission
6.3 qt
6.0 L
6-126
Capacities
Application
English
1.6 qt
140 lb ft
Transfer Case Fluid
Wheel Nut Torque
Metric
1.5 L
190 Y
†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active
Fuel Management™ (Iron Block)
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with
Active Fuel Management™
(Aluminum Block)
6.0L V8 with Active
Fuel Management™
(Aluminum Block)
6.2L V8 with Active Fuel
Management™ (Iron Block)
6.2L V8 Flexible Fuel
(Aluminum Block)
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
0
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
3
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
G
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
F
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
2
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
6-127
2 NOTES
6-128
Section 7
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-11
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:
.
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31.
.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
.
are driven off‐road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving on page 5‑12.
.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6‑7.
Introduction
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
As the vehicle owner, you are responsible for the
scheduled maintenance in this section. We recommend
having your dealer perform these services. Proper
vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good
working condition, improves fuel economy, and reduces
vehicle emissions for better air quality.
Because of all the different ways people use vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services. Please read the
information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.
7-2
{ WARNING:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you
have any doubt, see your dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 6‑5.
At your dealer, you can be certain that you will receive
the highest level of service available. Your dealer has
specially trained service technicians, uses genuine
replacement parts, as well as, up to date tools and
equipment to ensure fast and accurate diagnostics.
Scheduled Maintenance
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7‑11 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 7‑13. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer.
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑18. An Emission Control Service.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and performance of the
vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service
for new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to
13 000 km (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 6‑78.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon
Message Displays
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays,
service is required for the vehicle as soon as possible,
within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the
best conditions, the engine oil life system might not
indicate the need for vehicle service for more than
a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and the oil life system must be reset.
Your dealer has trained service technicians who will
perform this work and reset the system. If the engine
oil life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last service.
Reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑20.
7-3
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
The services described for Maintenance I should be
performed at every engine oil change. The services
described for Maintenance II should be
performed when:
.
Maintenance I was performed the last time the
engine oil was changed.
.
It has been 10 months or more since the Change
Engine Oil Soon message has displayed or since
the last service.
Maintenance I
.
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑18. An Emission Control Service.
.
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑32.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑41.
.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑72.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑78.
.
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑78.
7-4
.
Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must
be repaired and the fluid level checked.
.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven
in dusty conditions only). See Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter on page 6‑22.
.
Brake system inspection (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
Maintenance II
.
Perform all services described in Maintenance I.
.
Steering and suspension inspection. Visual
inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts
or signs of wear.
.
Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage,
and parking brake cable guides. Control arm
ball joints on 2500 series vehicles require
lubrication but should not be lubricated unless
their temperature is −12°C (10°F) or higher, or
they could be damaged. Control arm ball joints
on 1500 series vehicles are maintenance‐free.
.
Engine cooling system inspection. Visual
inspection of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps
and replacement, if needed.
.
.
.
.
Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear,
cracking, or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning, if contaminated. See
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades on
page 6‑114. Worn or damaged wiper blade
replacement. See Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 6‑61.
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
.
Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑18.
.
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑32.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑41.
Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders,
folding seat hardware, and liftgate hinges,
linkage, and handle pivot points lubrication.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11. More frequent lubrication may be
required when vehicle is exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Once a Month
Restraint system component check. See Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 2‑101.
Once a Year
Automatic transmission fluid level check
and adding fluid, if needed. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on
page 6‑24 or Automatic Transmission Fluid
(6-Speed Transmission) on page 6‑27.
.
Four‐wheel drive vehicles: Transfer case fluid level
check and adding fluid, if needed.
.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑22.
.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑72.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑78.
.
Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑9.
.
Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park)
mechanism check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑9.
7-5
.
Automatic transmission shiftlock control system
check. See Owner Checks and Services on
page 7‑9.
.
Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 7‑9.
.
Hood and liftgate gas strut support service.
Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear,
corrosion, cracks, loss of lubricant, or other
damage. Check the hold open ability of gas strut.
Replace as necessary with genuine parts from
your dealer.
.
Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure
check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser
outside cleaning. See Cooling System on
page 6‑30.
.
Exhaust system and nearby heat shields
inspection for loose or damaged components.
.
Accelerator pedal check for damage, high effort,
or binding. Replace if needed.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
40 000 km/25,000 Miles
.
7-6
Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
80 000 km/50,000 Miles
.
Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑22.
.
Automatic transmission fluid change (severe
service) for vehicles with Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) over 3 901 kg (8,600 lbs) or mainly
driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather, in hilly
or mountainous terrain, when frequently towing a
trailer, or used for taxi, police, or delivery service.
See Automatic Transmission Fluid (4-Speed
Transmission) on page 6‑24 or Automatic
Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission) on
page 6‑27.
.
Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid change
(severe service) for vehicles mainly driven when
frequently towing a trailer, or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. Check vent hose at transfer
case for kinks and proper installation. Check to
be sure vent hose is unobstructed, clear, and free
of debris. During any maintenance, if a power
washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the
underbody, care should be taken to not directly
spray the transfer case output seals. High pressure
water can overcome the seals and contaminate
the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer case and should
be replaced.
.
Evaporative control system inspection. Check all
fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook‐up,
routing, and condition. Check that the purge valve,
if the vehicle has one, works properly. Replace as
needed. An Emission Control Service. The U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency or the California
Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not
nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of the vehicle's useful
life. We, however, urge that all recommended
maintenance services be performed at the
indicated intervals and the maintenance be
recorded.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.
Automatic transmission fluid change (normal
service). See Automatic Transmission Fluid
(4-Speed Transmission) on page 6‑24 or
Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed
Transmission) on page 6‑27.
.
Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid change
(normal service). Check vent hose at transfer
case for kinks and proper installation. Check to
be sure vent hose is unobstructed, clear, and free
of debris. During any maintenance, if a power
washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the
underbody, care should be taken to not directly
spray the transfer case output seals. High pressure
water can overcome the seals and contaminate
the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer case and should
be replaced.
.
Spark plug replacement and spark plug wires
inspection. An Emission Control Service.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.
Engine cooling system drain, flush, and refill,
cooling system and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator and air conditioning
condenser (or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). See Engine Coolant on page 6‑32.
An Emission Control Service.
.
Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An Emission Control
Service.
7-7
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.
Engine coolant level check.
Windshield washer fluid level check.
Tire inflation pressures check.
Tire wear inspection.
Rotate tires.
Fluids visual leak check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only).
Brake system inspection.
Steering and suspension inspection.
Chassis components lubrication.
Engine cooling system inspection.
Windshield wiper blades inspection.
Body components lubrication.
Restraint system components check.
Automatic transmission fluid level check.
Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid level check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions).
7-8
Maintenance I
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Owner Checks and Services
Starter Switch Check
{ WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{ WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑48.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3‑48.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
dealer for service.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
out of P (Park), contact your dealer for service.
7-9
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
.
The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when
the shift lever is in P (Park).
.
The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
{ WARNING:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
7-10
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
.
To check the parking brake's holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held
by the parking brake only.
.
To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Engine Oil
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
To determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil
on page 6‑18.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 6‑32.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
Hydraulic Brake
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
System
in Canada 89021320).
Usage
Windshield
Washer
Fluid/Lubricant
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
GM Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
Key Lock
Cylinders
Chassis
Lubrication
Front Axle
(1500 Series
Vehicles with
Four-Wheel
Drive)
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242)
or lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021671,
in Canada 89021672).
7-11
Usage
Front Axle
(2500 Series
Vehicles with
Four-Wheel
Drive)
Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678).
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678).
Transfer Case
(Four‐Wheel
Drive)
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
Front Axle
Propshaft Spline
or One-Piece Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
Propshaft Spline (GM Part No. U.S. 12345879,
(Two-Wheel
in Canada 10953511).
Drive with Auto.
Trans.)
7-12
Usage
Hood Hinges
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease with
Teflon, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Standard Filter
15908916*
A3086C*
High Capacity Filter
15908915
A3085C
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Oil Filter
89017524
PF48
Spark Plugs
12621258
41-110
Front – 21.6 in (55.0 cm)
25877402
—
Rear – 11.8 in (30.0 cm)
25820122
—
Wiper Blades
*15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
7-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the
Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.
7-14
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
7-15
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date
7-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
7-17
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date
7-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Section 8
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . .
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . .
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . .
Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-15
8-15
8-15
8-16
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-18
8-19
8-19
8-19
8-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer's sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of
all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.
8-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in
the U.S., call the GMC Consumer Relations Manager
at 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Customer
Assistance prompt). In Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication at 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting GMC, remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's facility. That is why we
suggest following Step One first.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs
or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program prior to filling out a
court action, use of the program is free of charge and
your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you
do not agree with the decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-3
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, General Motors of Canada Limited wants
you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle
service claims. The program provides for the review
of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter,
and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your
complaint to the final decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial
program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free
of charge.
8-4
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/gmc
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools
and forms with greater ease.
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
.
Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
.
Online service and maintenance records
.
Find GMC dealers for service nationwide
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
.
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
.
OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
GMC — www.gmc.com
GMC Merchandise — www.gmccollection.com
Help Center — www.gmc.com/helpcenter
.
FAQ
.
Contact Us
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
.
My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
.
My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.
.
My Driveway: Access quick links to parts
and service estimates, check trade-in values,
or schedule a service appointment by adding
the vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
.
My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
8-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use the Text Telephones
(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can
communicate with GMC by dialing: 1-800-GMC-8583
(462-8583). (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to write
or e-mail GMC, the letter should be addressed to:
United States
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
All Overseas Locations
www.GMC.com
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583)
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
8-6
From Puerto Rico
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle's eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1‐800‐GMC-8782
(1‐800‐462‐8782); (Text telephone (TTY):
1‐888‐889‐2438).
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your
vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift.
8-7
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
.
Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
.
Telephone number of your location
.
Location of the vehicle
.
Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
.
Description of the problem
Coverage
GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or
driver if they decide the claims are made too often,
or the same type of claim is made many times.
Services Provided
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough
fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service
station.
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service is provided to unlock
the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock
may be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
.
Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest GMC dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud,
or snow.
.
Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to
change a flat tire with the spare tire. The spare
tire, if equipped, must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's responsibility
for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
Services are provided up to 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In
Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission
from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. GMC and General Motors of Canada
Limited reserve the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
8-8
.
Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If
your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure,
incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the
5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain
warranty period. Items considered are hotel,
meals, and rental car.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not
provided through this service.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is
required.
.
Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests
per year.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
Must be over 250 kilometres from where your
trip was started to qualify. General Motors of
Canada Limited requires pre-authorization,
original detailed receipts, and a copy of the repair
orders. Once authorization has been received, the
Roadside Assistance advisor will help you make
arrangements and explain how to receive payment.
.
Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
.
Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
.
Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
.
Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
8-9
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling
a service appointment and advising your service
consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer
can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem
is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/
retailer, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Courtesy Transportation Program
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and
Canada.
8-10
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while
you wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM
helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing
several transportation options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the
following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination
with minimal interruption of your daily schedule.
This includes one‐way or round trip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance parameters of
the dealer's area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer's
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental
vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an
overnight warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will
be limited and must be supported by original receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental
vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes,
levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not
be available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
8-11
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle's resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to
ensure that your vehicle's designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM
New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
8-12
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle's
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known. Such
parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion
problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer may have a collision repair
center with GM-trained technicians and state of the art
equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts.
Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be
repaired with GM original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end
of your lease for poor quality repairs.
.
Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
.
If there has been an injury, call emergency
services for help. Do not leave the scene of a
crash until all matters have been taken care of.
Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in
danger or you are instructed to move it by a police
officer.
.
Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
.
If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑7 for more information.
.
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver's name,
the service's name, and the phone number.
.
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you keep
these items in your vehicle.
8-13
.
.
.
.
8-14
Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver's license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance
company and policy number, and a general
description of the damage to the other vehicle.
If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy
of the report for a nominal fee. In some states/
provinces with “no fault” insurance laws, a report
may not be necessary. This is especially true if
there are no injuries and both vehicles are
driveable.
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer or a private
collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure
you are comfortable with them. Remember, you
will have to feel comfortable with their work for a
long time.
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the
repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your
repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not
pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors
of Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
1-800-333-0510
8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Service Manuals
Call 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782), or write:
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
8-16
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an
order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in
a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help your dealer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules may
also retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as
radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-17
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
.
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
.
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
.
How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
8-18
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar®
If the vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions in the OnStar Owners Guide for information
on data collection and use.
Navigation System
Radio Frequency Statement
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio
frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other GM
system containing personal information.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
8-19
2 NOTES
8-20
A
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Active Fuel Management™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . 5-37
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Airbag
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-100
Airbag System
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . 2-92
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Antenna
Rear Side Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-140
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-109
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-108
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . 6-114
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
i-1
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-136
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-139
Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-134
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-136
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . . . .4-140
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24, 6-27
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Autoride® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Auxiliary
Roof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
i-2
Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Bench Seat, Split (60/40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Brake
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Pedal and Adjustable Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Bucket Seats, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13, 3-15
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Care of
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
CD, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99, 4-106
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-109
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-108
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
i-3
Cleaning (cont.)
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . 6-114
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System . . . . . . . 4-27
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System,
Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Clock, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Engine Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Cooled Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
i-4
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . 8-16
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
DIC Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Disc, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99, 4-106
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Dome Lamp Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Door
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48, 4-55
DIC Vehicle Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Driving
At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Before a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
In Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Dual Automatic Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-125
E
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
EDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Electrical System
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . . . . 6-118
Underhood Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Check and Service Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
i-5
Engine (cont.)
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Fan Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Overheated Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
i-6
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Flat Tire, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24, 6-27
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41, 3-46, 6-52
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Fuses
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Underhood Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
G
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Gasoline
Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Headlamps
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 2-9
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
i-7
I
L
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Instrument Panel
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System (ITBC) . . . . 5-49
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Lamps
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Dome Lamp Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
LATCH System for Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Liftgate, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Liftgate/Liftglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Liftglass/Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Lighting
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
K
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
i-8
Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Highbeam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Locks
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Locks (cont.)
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Lumbar
Manual Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
M
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Manual Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
i-9
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Outside Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Outside Towing Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99, 4-106
N
Navigation System, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
O
Object Detection, Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . 3-60
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
i - 10
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
OnStar, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Operation, Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . 3-69
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Outlets
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Power Foldaway Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Towing Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode . . . . 6-39
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Owners, Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
P
Paint, Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Park Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Parking
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . .6-5
Phone
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Power (cont.)
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Proposition 65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Radios
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-139
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-136
i - 11
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System . . . . . . . . 4-27
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and
Electronic Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Rear Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Rear Seat Entertainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-134
Rear Side Window Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
i - 12
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4, 3-5
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Replacement Parts
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-101
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-102
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
S
Safety Belts
Care of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Safety Belts Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Seats
60/40 Split Bench Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Bucket Seats, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Heated and Cooled Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Heated Seats - Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Memory, Mirrors and Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Seats (cont.)
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Secondary Latch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle . . . 6-6
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
Shifting
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Side Blind Zone Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
i - 13
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Split Bench Seat (60/40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Steps
Power Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Storage Areas
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
i - 14
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
System
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps . . . . . . 6-58
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Time, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Installing the Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Removing the Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Secondary Latch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-107
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Towing
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Trailer Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Traction
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Trailer
Towing Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24, 6-27
Transmission Operation, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
U
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
i - 15
V
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Ventilation Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
W
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Safety and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
i - 16
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Where to Put the Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Wipers
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
X
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-140
Download PDF
Similar pages